bbu3900 hardware description
DESCRIPTION
This document describes the BBU3900 hardware, such as boards, module, ports, cables, andconnectors, and the functions of the hardware.TRANSCRIPT
BBU3900
Hardware Description
Issue 08
Date 2011-09-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
PurposeThis document describes the BBU3900 hardware, such as boards, module, ports, cables, andconnectors, and the functions of the hardware.
Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
DBS3900 WCDMA V200R013C00
iDBS3900 WCDMA V200R013C00
DBS3900 GSM V100R013C00
DBS3900 V100R004C00
DBS3900 LTE V100R003C00
Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:
l Install engineersl Field engineersl System engineers
Organization1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.
2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
BBU3900Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installedremotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors.
3 DBS3900 Power System
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. WhenAC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to-48 V DC power for the base station.
4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in thecabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU andUEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components toachieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
5 BBU3900 Equipment
This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.
6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of theDBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configuredin the DBS3900.
7 BBU3900 Cables
This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, andinstallation positions.
8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA andSLPU.
ConventionsSymbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.
BBU3900Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Symbol Description
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
BBU3900Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.
BBU3900Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description...........................................................................1
2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets........................................................................................................62.1 Exteriors and Functions of DBS3900 Cabinets..................................................................................................72.2 Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900.........................................................................................92.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)...................................................................................292.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).......................................................................332.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.............................................................................................41
3 DBS3900 Power System..............................................................................................................473.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)................................................................................................................................................................................483.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C)....................................................................................................................................................................493.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06........................................543.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)....................................................................583.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)....................................................633.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.......................................................................70
4 DBS3900 Monitoring System....................................................................................................734.1 BBU Monitoring Port.......................................................................................................................................744.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)..............................................................................754.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)................................................................764.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06...................................................................................804.5 Customized Alarm Input..................................................................................................................................82
5 BBU3900 Equipment...................................................................................................................865.1 Exterior of the BBU3900..................................................................................................................................875.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900...............................................................................................................88
5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900...........................................................................................................885.2.2 WMPT...................................................................................................................................................1005.2.3 GTMU...................................................................................................................................................1045.2.4 LMPT.....................................................................................................................................................1105.2.5 WBBP....................................................................................................................................................1135.2.6 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................116
BBU3900Hardware Description Contents
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
5.2.7 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................1205.2.8 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................1215.2.9 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................1255.2.10 UTRP...................................................................................................................................................1265.2.11 USCU...................................................................................................................................................1325.2.12 UBRI....................................................................................................................................................134
6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900........................................................................................1376.1 Power Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................138
6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)..........................................................1386.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)..........................................1426.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.................................................................156
6.2 Transmission Cable Connections...................................................................................................................1586.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station..........................................1586.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station.............................................1606.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station........................................1626.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station..........................................1656.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station............................................1676.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station..............................................1696.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................1706.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................1766.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode...............................................................................................................................................................1816.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode...............................................................................................................................................................1836.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................1846.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................1886.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode...............................................................................................................................................................1926.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................1966.2.15 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................1996.2.16 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................2056.2.17 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode...............................................................................................................................................................2106.2.18 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode........................................................................................................................................................................2136.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station.....................................................216
6.3 CPRI Cable Connections................................................................................................................................2186.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station....................................................................218
BBU3900Hardware Description Contents
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
6.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station.......................................................................2196.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station.................................................................2206.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station...................................................................................2226.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station..................................................................................2236.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station...............................................................................2256.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station..................................................................226
6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections...........................................................................................................2276.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)........................................2276.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).......................2346.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06.....................................................242
7 BBU3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................2457.1 List of BBU3900 Cables.................................................................................................................................2477.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................2497.3 BBU Power Cable..........................................................................................................................................2507.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)..............................................................................................................................2517.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C).............................................................................................................................2527.6 E1/T1 Cable....................................................................................................................................................2537.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable..........................................................................................................2567.8 FE/GE Cable...................................................................................................................................................2577.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable...............................................................................................................2587.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports......................................................................................................2597.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports..........................................................................................................2597.12 FE/GE Optical Cable....................................................................................................................................2607.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable................................................................................................................................2617.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU.........................................................................2647.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU........................................................................2657.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU.......................................................................2667.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................2677.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...........................................................................................2687.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...........................................................................................2687.20 BBU Alarm Cable........................................................................................................................................2697.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................271
8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900.........................................................................................2728.1 EMUA............................................................................................................................................................2748.2 OMB...............................................................................................................................................................2748.3 IMB03.............................................................................................................................................................2788.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack........................................................................................................................2818.5 DCDU-03........................................................................................................................................................2828.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C..........................................................................................................................2858.7 AC/DC Power Equipment..............................................................................................................................2908.8 SLPU..............................................................................................................................................................294
8.8.1 Exterior of SLPU...................................................................................................................................294
BBU3900Hardware Description Contents
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU....................................................................................................................2958.8.3 UELP.....................................................................................................................................................2968.8.4 UFLP.....................................................................................................................................................2978.8.5 USLP2...................................................................................................................................................298
8.9 WGRU............................................................................................................................................................300
BBU3900Hardware Description Contents
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.
08 (2011-09-30)This is the eighth commercial issue.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
5.2.3 GTMU The E1 bypass function is deleted.
5.2.10 UTRP The description of DIP switches is changed.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), no information is deleted.
07 (2011-08-30)This is the seventh commercial issue.
Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
5.2.5 WBBP Added the baseband transfer capacity of theWBBP.
Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), no information is deleted.
06 (2011-07-30)This is the sixth commercial issue.
BBU3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), no information is added.
Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 andAPM30H (Ver.A)
Added the requirements of customerequipment specifications.
2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B)or APM30H (Ver.C)
Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), no information is deleted.
05 (2011-06-25)
This is the fifth commercial issue.
Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), no information is added.
Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
5.2.8 UPEU Added the description of the power of theUPEU.
Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), no information is deleted.
04 (2011-05-25)
This is the fourth commercial issue.
Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker andPower Cables for the OMB, IMB03, andIFS06
The recommended configurations of theupper-level circuit breaker and power cablesare modified.
3.2 Configurations of the Upper-LevelCircuit Breaker and Power Cables for theAMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), no information is deleted.
BBU3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
03 (2011-04-30)
This is the third commercial issue.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), this issue is added with the following topic:
l 2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)
l 2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for theAPM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)
l 3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for theAMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
l 6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
l 6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
l 6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C)
l 6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), no information is changed.
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), no information is deleted.
02 (2011-04-10)
This is the second commercial issue.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900 The maximum quantity of the WBBP ismodified.
Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), no information is deleted.
BBU3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
01 (2011-03-30)This is the first commercial issue.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is added.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is changed.
Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is deleted.
Draft B (2011-03-10)This is the Draft version.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), no information is added.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LOBase Station
Some descriptions are optimized.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), no information is deleted.
Draft A (2011-01-30)This is the Draft version.
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTSV100R012C00, this issue is added with the following topic:l 3 DBS3900 Power Systeml Cabinets for the DBS3900l 6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Stationl 6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Stationl 8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTSV100R012C00, the following part is modified:
Part Modification
5.2.7 FAN The description of the FANc is added.
5.2.8 UPEU The description of the UPEUc is added.
6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in theTriple-Mode Base Station
The description of triple mode scenario isadded.
5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900
6.4.1 Monitoring Signal CableConnections of the APM30 or APM30H(Ver.A)
BBU3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
Part Modification
2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 andAPM30H (Ver.A)
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTSV100R012C00, no information is deleted.
BBU3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
About This Chapter
The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installedremotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
2.1 Exteriors and Functions of DBS3900 CabinetsAs required in outdoor scenarios, Huawei offers multiple cabinets with different functions forthe DBS3900. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets such as the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A),APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C), TMC series cabinets such as the TMC, TMC11H(Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H(Ver.C), and storage battery cabinets such as the BBC,IBBS200D, and IBBS200T.
ExteriorFigure 2-1 shows the exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet.
Figure 2-1 Exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
FunctionNOTEFor details about the functions of the matched cabinets, see the APM30 User Guide, APM30H UserGuide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D/T User Guide, and APM30H(Ver.C) Product Description.
The main functions of the DBS3900 cabinet are as follows:l The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used
for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide ACand DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stationsused outdoors and also provide space for customer equipment.
l The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) are heat dissipation andmonitoring modes. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchangercooler. The APM30 uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the APM30H(Ver.A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heatdissipation. The APM30 is configured with the APM power monitoring interface unit(APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment and powermonitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the heat exchange unit type A(HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.
l The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and the APM30H (Ver.B) are monitoringand power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA for fanmonitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the centralmonitoring unit type A (CMUA) for centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.A) isconfigured with the power distribution unit (PDU) for power distribution, and the APM30H(Ver.B) is configured with the embedded power supply system (EPS) for powerdistribution. In addition, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the electronic labelingunit (ELU) for automatic reporting of cabinet type.
l The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) are monitoring andpower distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with the central monitoringunit type E (CMUE) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver.B) isconfigured with the CMUA for centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.C) is configuredwith the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) for power distribution, and the APM30H(Ver.B) is configured with the EPS for power distribution.
l The transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are the transmission cabinets used forHuawei radio communication products outdoors. The TMC series cabinets provide DCpower distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations andalso provide space for customer equipment.
l The differences between the TMC and the TMC11H (Ver.A) are heat dissipation andmonitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and the TMC11H(Ver.B) are monitoring modes. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. The TMC uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and theTMC11H (Ver.A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulationfans for heat dissipation. The TMC is configured with the APMI and AFMU for monitoring,the TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA for monitoring, and the TMC11H(Ver.B) is configured with the CMUA and HPMI for monitoring. In addition, the TMC11H(Ver.B) is configured with the ELU for automatic reporting of cabinet type.
l The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and the TMC11H (Ver.B) are monitoringand power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured with the CMUE for fanmonitoring and alarm reporting, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the CMUAfor centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured with the DCDU-11B for
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
power distribution, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the DCDU-03B for powerdistribution. DCDU is short for direct current distribution unit.
l Storage battery cabinets are used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. Thecabinets provide space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup powerfor the distributed base station and separate base station. The differences between theintegrated battery backup system with direct cooler (IBBS200D) and the integrated batterybackup system with TEC (IBBS200T) are the configurations of the modules in the cabinets.For details, see Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900. TEC is short forthermoelectric cooling unit.
For exteriors and functions of the outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box-03 (IMB03), andindoor floor installation support-06 (IFS06), see 8.2 OMB, 8.3 IMB03, and IFS06 respectively.
2.2 Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900This section describes the module or board configurations of the matched cabinets for theDBS3900.
APMThe APM series cabinets are classified into the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B),and APM30H (Ver.C) based on different versions. Figure 2-2 shows the module configurationsin the APM series cabinets.
Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets
The APM series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation, power distribution,and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of thecabinets, as listed in Table 2-1.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
APM30 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,APM powermonitoringinterface unit(APMI), andAPM fanmonitoringinterface unit(AFMU) isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
2 PDU Mandatory 1 The powerdistributionunit (PDU)distributesAC powerand DCpower.
3 BBU Mandatory 1 Thebasebandunit (BBU) isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder thePDU,processingbasebandsignals.
4 PSU (AC/DC)
Mandatory 3 The powersupply unit(PSU)converts 220V AC powerinto –48 VDC power. Itis configuredonly in theAC cabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
5 PMU Mandatory 1 The powermonitoringunit (PMU)is configuredonly in theAC cabinet.
APM30H(Ver.A)
1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,heatexchangeunit type A(HEUA),and HERTpowermonitoringinterface unit(HPMI) isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.HERT isshort forHuaweiEnhancedRadioTechnology.
2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower.
3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder thePDU,processingbasebandsignals.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
4 PSU (AC/DC)
Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto –48 VDC power. Itis configuredonly in theAC cabinet.
5 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.
APM30H(Ver.B)
1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,HPMI, andcentralmonitoringunit type A(CMUA) isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protecttrunksignals, asignallightningprotectionunit (SLPU)configuredwith theuniversal E1/T1 lightningprotectionunit (UELP)or universalFE lightningprotectionunit (UFLP)ismandatory.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceon the top ofthe cabinet.To protectmonitoringsignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s isoptional. TheSLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceunder theBBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
3 EPS Mandatory 1 Theembeddedpowersupplysystem(EPS)distributesAC powerand DCpower. It isconfiguredonly in theAPM30H(Ver.B).
4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theEPS,processingbasebandsignals.
5 PSU (AC/DC)
Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto –48 VDC power. Itis configuredonly in theAC cabinet.
6 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
APM30H(Ver.C)
1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,HPMI, andcentralmonitoringunit type E(CMUE) isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protecttrunksignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith theUELP orUFLP ismandatory.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceon the top ofthe cabinet.To protectmonitoringsignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s isoptional. TheSLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceunder theBBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
3 EPU Mandatory 1 Theembeddedpowersubrack unit(EPU)distributesAC powerand DCpower. It isconfiguredonly in theAPM30H(Ver.C).
4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theEPU,processingbasebandsignals.
5 PSU (AC/DC)
Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto –48 VDC power. Itis configuredonly in theAC cabinet.
6 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.
TMCThe transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A),and TMC11H (Ver.B) based on different versions. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinetwith heat-exchanger cooler. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the followingtwo types based on different application scenarios:l TMC providing space for the transmission equipment, as shown in Figure 2-3.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)
l TMC configured with the BBU in the –48 V DC power supply scenario, as shown in Figure2-4.
Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)
The TMC series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation and monitoring modes.The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table2-2.
Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
TMC 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,APMI, andAFMU isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The TMCisconfigured with adirectcurrentdistributionunit-03C(DCDU-03C)when theTMCprovidesonlyspace forthetransmissionequipment.
l The TMCwith abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-03B in the–48 V DCpowersupplyscenario.
3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
TMC11H(Ver.A)
1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,HEUA, andHPMI isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver.A)isconfigured with aDCDU-03C whenthe TMCprovidesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.
l TheTMC11H(Ver.A)with abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-03B in the–48 V DCpowersupplyscenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.
TMC11H(Ver.B)
1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,HPMI, andCMUA isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protecttrunksignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith theUELP orUFLP ismandatory.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceon the top ofthe cabinet.To protectmonitoringsignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s canbeconfigured.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceunder theBBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
3 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver.B) isconfigured with aDCDU-03C whenthe TMCprovidesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.
l TheTMC11H(Ver.B)with abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-03B in the–48 V DCpowersupplyscenario.
4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
TMC11H(Ver.C)
1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxconfiguredwith a fan,HPMI, andCMUE isinstalled onthe top of thecabinet.
2 SLPU Mandatory 2 To protecttrunksignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith theUELP orUFLP ismandatory.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceon the top ofthe cabinet.To protectmonitoringsignals, anSLPUconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s canbeconfigured.The SLPU isinstalled inthe 1 U spaceunder theBBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
3 DCDU-11 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver.C) isconfigured with aDCDU-11C whenthe TMCprovidesspaceonly forthetransmissionequipment.
l TheTMC11H(Ver.C)with abuilt-inBBU isconfigured with aDCDU-11B in the–48 V DCpowersupplyscenario.
4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-11B,processingbasebandsignals.
BBC/IBBSThe battery cabinets are classified into the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B),IBBS200T (Ver.C), and IBBS200D based on different versions. BBC is short for battery backupcabinet. Figure 2-5 shows the module configurations in the battery cabinets.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets
The IBBS200D is different from the IBBS200T in heat dissipation mode. The differences areachieved through the monitoring modules installed in different positions in the cabinets, as listedin Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
BBC 1 Powersupply boxfor theheating film
Mandatory 1 The powersupply boxfeeds powerto the heatingfilm.
2 Ground barof the cabinet
Mandatory 1 The groundbar is usedfor thegrounding ofthecomponentsin thecabinet.
3 Storagebattery
Mandatory 8 The storagebatteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.
4 BBC Mandatory 4 The BBCprovidespower tostoragebatteries.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
IBBS200T(Ver.A)
1 TEC Mandatory 1 Thethermoelectric coolingunit (TEC) isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.
2 Transferterminal forsignal cables
Mandatory 1 The transferterminalblock isinstalled onthe inner sideof the frontdoor of thecabinet. Itconsists offourinterconnection terminals.
3 Transferterminal forthe inputpower cablefor the TEC
Mandatory 1 The transferterminal isinstalled onthe inner sideof the frontdoor of thecabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
4 Heatinsulationfoam
Mandatory 1 The heatinsulationfoam isinstalled onthe left in thecabinet.
5 Storagebattery
Mandatory 8 The storagebatteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.
6 Junction boxfor the powercable
Mandatory 1 The junctionbox isinstalled onthe right intheIBBS200T.It consists ofthe copperbar, circuitbreaker forthe batteries,and circuitbreaker forthe TEC.
IBBS200D 1 Fan Mandatory 2 The fan isinstalled onthe frontdoor of thecabinet,dissipatingheat in thecabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
2 CMUA Mandatory 1 The CMUAprovidesfunctions oftemperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.
3 Storagebattery
Mandatory 8 The storagebatteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.
4 Powerdistributionbox
Mandatory 1 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled onthe upperright side ofthe cabinet. Ittransfers anddistributespower to theTEC or FANunit and tostoragebatteries.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
IBBS200T(Ver.B)/(Ver.C)
1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.
2 CMUA Mandatory 1 The CMUAprovidesfunctions oftemperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
CabinetType
SN Module/Board
Optional/Mandatory
MaximumNumberConfigured in aSingleCabinet
Description
3 Powerdistributionbox
Mandatory 8 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled onthe upperright side ofthe cabinet. Ittransfers anddistributespower to theTEC or FANunit and tostoragebatteries.
4 Storagebattery
Mandatory 1 The storagebatteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.
OMB/IMB03/IFS06For the structures of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06, see 8.2 OMB, 8.3 IMB03, and IFS06respectively.
2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets can be used fora DBS3900 to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.
Cabinet Configuration PrinciplesNOTEIn this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A), and the TMC is TMC or TMC11H(Ver.A).
l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations.
l A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
l A single APM supports only one TMC and a maximum of one integrated battery backupsystem with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
l A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-wire fiber optic cables can be led out froma single APM.
l A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.l The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet.l A backup battery cabinet (BBC) or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same
type or be stacked under a TMC.l If an extension cabinet such as a battery cabinet or transmission cabinet is required during
an initial site deployment, the extension cabinet is placed on the left, and the basic cabinetis placed on the right. If both an extension battery cabinet and an extension transmissioncabinet are required, the battery cabinet is placed on the left of the basic cabinet and thetransmission cabinet is placed onto the battery cabinet or on the left of the battery cabinet.
l Clearance must be reserved during an initial site deployment for future capacity expansion.In a capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated and new cabinetsare added only to the right of the original cabinets unless they are required to be installedto the left of the original cabinets in exactly the reverse order of the original cabinets.
Requirements of Customer Equipment SpecificationsCustomer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements:l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-6):
– The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standardequipment.
– The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 310 mm if the equipment supportsnatural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of thecustomer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back.
– A maximum cabling pace in front of the panel is 70 mm.l Requirement for air vents:
– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the rightand left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front toback.
– If the customer equipment support natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must bereserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l Requirement for temperature– In areas where the highest temperature is or is below 40°C, the customer must be able
to function properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 55°C oreven higher temperature.
– In areas where the highest temperature is above 40°C, the customer must be able tofunction properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 60°C or evenhigher temperature.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Figure 2-6 Requirements of customer equipment dimension and ventilation
(1) Customer equipment withnatural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment with airvents on the right and left
(3) Customer equipment with airvents on the front and back
Cabinet Configurations in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base StationNOTEThe APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario only.
A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which isinstalled in the APM. When 6 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU isinstalled in the basic APM, which is on the left.
The configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on therequirements for power backup, reserved space, and RRU configuration. Table 2-4 lists theconfigurations.
Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations in a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Input Power BackupPowerRequirement
ReservedSpace
RRU CabinetConfiguration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No backuppowerrequirement
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM andone TMC
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andone TMC
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Input Power BackupPowerRequirement
ReservedSpace
RRU CabinetConfiguration
0.5- or 2-hourbackup power
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM andone IBBS
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM, oneTMC, and oneIBBS
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andtwo IBBSs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs, twoIBBSs, and oneTMC
–48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RRUs One TMC withone built-inDCDU
≤ 8 U ≤ 12 RRUs One TMC withtwo built-inDCDUs
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if no power backup is required, the cabinetconfiguration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirementsof reserved space and RRU configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the configurations.
Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if no powerbackup is required
If the 0.5- or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode ordual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRUconfiguration. Figure 2-8 shows the configurations.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 0.5- or 2-hour backup power is required
In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-modebase station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRU configuration.Figure 2-9 shows the configurations.
Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a –48 V DCpower supply scenario
2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C)
In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets can be used forthe DBS3900 to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.
Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 remote radio units (RRUs).
If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in more than one DBS3900.
l A single advanced power module (APM) or transmission cabinet (TMC) can provide powerto a maximum of six RRUs.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
l A single APM can be configured with only one TMC and a maximum of two integratedbattery backup systems with direct cooler (IBBS200Ds) or integrated battery backupsystems with TEC (IBBS200Ts). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
l A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-wire fiber optic cables can be led out froma single APM.
l A single direct current distribution unit (DCDU) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.l The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the storage battery cabinet.l A backup battery cabinet (BBC) or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same
type or be stacked under a TMC.l If an auxiliary cabinet such as a storage battery cabinet or transmission cabinet is required
during an initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is placed on the left, and the basiccabinet is placed on the right. If both the storage battery cabinet and the transmission cabinetare required, the storage battery cabinet is placed on the left of the basic cabinet and thetransmission cabinet is placed onto the storage battery cabinet or on the left of the storagebattery cabinet.
l Clearance must be reserved during an initial site deployment for future capacity expansion.In the capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated and new cabinetsare added only to the right of the original cabinets unless they are required to be installedto the left of the original cabinets in exactly the reverse order of the original cabinets.
Requirements of Customer Equipment SpecificationsCustomer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements:l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-10):
– The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standardequipment.
– The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment supportsnatural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of thecustomer equipment is 250 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back.
– A maximum cabling pace in front of the panel is 100 mm.l Requirement for air vents:
– If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the rightand left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front toback.
– If the customer equipment support natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must bereserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
l Requirement for temperature– In areas where the highest temperature is or is below 40°C, the customer must be able
to function properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 55°C oreven higher temperature.
– In areas where the highest temperature is above 40°C, the customer must be able tofunction properly at –10°C temperature or even lower temperature and at 60°C or evenhigher temperature.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
Figure 2-10 Requirements of customer equipment dimension and ventilation
(1) Customer equipment withnatural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment with airvents on the right and left
(3) Customer equipment with airvents on the front and back
Cabinet Configurations in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode ScenarioOnly one baseband unit (BBU) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario and theBBU is installed in the APM. If 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a DBS3900, two APMs arerequired and the BBU is configured in the left APM cabinet, which is the basic APM.
The configuration of a DBS3900 in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario varies depending onthe requirements of power backup, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration.Table 2-5 lists the configurations.
Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Power Supply PowerBackup
ReservedClearance
CarrierFrequencyConfiguration
CabinetConfiguration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No powerbackup
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM andone TMC
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andone TMC
0.5-hour or 2-hour backuppower
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM andone IBBS
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
Power Supply PowerBackup
ReservedClearance
CarrierFrequencyConfiguration
CabinetConfiguration
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM, oneTMC, and oneIBBS
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andtwo IBBSs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs, twoIBBSs, and oneTMC
4-hour, 6-hour,or 8-hourbackup power
≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM andtwo IBBSs
≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RRUs One APM, twoIBBSs, and oneTMC
≤ 12 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andfour IBBSs
≤ 23 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs,four IBBSs, andone TMC
–48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RRUs One TMC withone built-inDCDU
≤ 8 U ≤ 12 RRUs One TMC withtwo built-inDCDUs
+24 V DC - ≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RRUs One +24 V DCAPM30H(Ver.B)
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if there is no backup power requirement,the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on therequirements of reserved clearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-11 shows theconfigurations.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if no backuppower is required
If the 0.5-hour backup power or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration ofa single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reservedclearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-12 shows the configurations.
Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 0.5-houror 2-hour backup power is required
If the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved clearance andcarrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-13 shows the configurations.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 4-hour,6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required
In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-modebase station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and carrier frequencyconfiguration. Figure 2-14 shows the configurations.
Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a –48 V DCpower supply scenario
Figure 2-15 shows the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a+24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a +24 V DCpower supply scenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode DBS3900Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The basic BBU is BBU0, which isinstalled in the basic APM or TMC on the left. The extension BBU is BBU1, which is installedin the extension APM or TMC on the right.
The configuration of a triple-mode DBS3900 varies depending on the requirements of powerbackup, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration. Table 2-6 lists theconfigurations.
Table 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode DBS3900
Power Supply PowerBackup
ReservedClearance
CarrierFrequencyConfiguration
CabinetConfiguration
110 V AC or220 V AC
No powerbackup
≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andone TMC
0.5-hour or 2-hour backuppower
≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andtwo IBBSs
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs, twoIBBSs, and oneTMC
4-hour, 6-hour,or 8-hourbackup power
≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs andfour IBBSs
≤ 21 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two APMs,four IBBSs, andone TMC
–48 V DC - ≤ 18 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two TMC
+24 V DC - ≤ 10 U ≤ 12 RRUs Two +24 V DCAPM30Hs(Ver.B)
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if no backup power is required, the cabinetconfiguration of a triple-mode base station varies depending on the requirement of reservedclearance. Figure 2-16 shows the configurations.
Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple mode DBS3900 if no backup power is required
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
If 0.5-hour or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode basestation varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-17 shows theconfigurations.
Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if the 0.5-hour or 2-hour backuppower is required
If the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-18 showsthe configurations.
Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hourbackup power is required
Figure 2-19 shows the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a –48 V DC powersupply scenario.
Figure 2-19 Cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a –48 V DC power supplyscenario
Figure 2-20 shows the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a +24 V DC powersupply scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
Figure 2-20 Cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supplyscenario
2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets are used for theDBS3900 to meet various requirements for usage environment, power input, reserved clearance,and carrier frequency configuration.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station
If a DBS3900 is configured with an outdoor mini box (OMB) or with an indoor mini box (IMB03)in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one baseband unit (BBU) can be configured andis configured in the OMB or the IMB03 and remote radio units (RRUs) can be installed on apole, a wall, a U-steel, or an angle steel.
If a DBS3900 is configured with both the IMB03 and the indoor floor installation support(IFS06), the IMB03 and the IFS06 can be installed together, a scenario where the DBS3900 isinstalled on an indoor centralized rack (ICR).
The configuration of a DBS3900 in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario varies depending onthe requirements of usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequencyconfiguration. Table 2-7 lists the configurations.
Table 2-7 Cabinet configurations in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Power Supply ReservedClearance
CarrierFrequencyConfiguration
CabinetConfiguration
ApplicationEnvironment
110 V AC or220 V AC
≤ 3 U One RRU One OMB Outdoors
≤ 6 U Six RRUs Two IMB03sand one IFS06
Indoors
≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03sand two IFS06s
≤ 3 U One RRU One IMB03
–48 V DC ≤ 3 U Three RRUs One OMB Outdoors
≤ 3 U Six RRUs One IMB03 andone IFS06
Indoors
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Power Supply ReservedClearance
CarrierFrequencyConfiguration
CabinetConfiguration
ApplicationEnvironment
≤ 6 U 12 RRUs Two IMB03sand two IFS06s
≤ 3 U Six RRUs One IMB03
+24 V DC ≤ 6 U Six RRUs Two IMB03sand one IFS06
Indoors
≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03sand two IFS06s
Figure 2-21 shows the configuration of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario in a110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario.
Figure 2-21 Configuration of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Figure 2-22 shows the configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual mode base station.
Figure 2-22 Configuration of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-23 shows the configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
Figure 2-23 Configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-24 shows the configuration of an OMB in a –48 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode base station inthe –48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-25 shows the configuration of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-25 Cabinet configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the–48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-26 shows the configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
Figure 2-26 Configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the –48V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-27 shows the configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station ina +24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 2-27 Configurations of an ICR in a single-mode and dual-mode base station in the +24V DC power supply scenario
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base StationIf a DBS3900 is configured with an ICR, the DBS3900 can be configured as a triple-mode basestation. In this case, two BBUs are required. The basic BBU is BBU0 and is placed on the leftor on the upper ICR. The extension BBU is BBU1 and is placed on the right or on the lowerICR.
NOTEIf a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or an IMB03, the DBS3900 can only be configured as a single-mode or dual-mode base station.
The configuration of a DBS3900 in a triple-mode scenario varies depending on the requirementsof usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration.Table 2-8 lists the configurations.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
Table 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power Supply ReservedClearance
CarrierFrequencyConfiguration
CabinetConfiguration
ApplicationEnvironment
110 V AC or220 V AC
≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03sand two IFS06s
Indoors
–48 V DC ≤ 6 U Six RRUs Two IMB03sand one IFS06
≤ 6 U 12 RRUs Two IMB03sand two IFS06s
+24 V DC ≤ 12 U 12 RRUs Four IMB03sand two IFS06s
Figure 2-28 shows the configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 110 V ACor 220 V AC power supply scenario.
Figure 2-28 Configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 VAC power supply scenario
Figure 2-29 shows the configuration of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the –48 V DCpower supply scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Figure 2-29 Configuration of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the –48 V DC power supplyscenario
Figure 2-30 shows the configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DCpower supply scenario.
Figure 2-30 Configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC powersupply scenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
3 DBS3900 Power System
About This Chapter
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. WhenAC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to-48 V DC power for the base station.
Table 3-1, Table 3-2, and Table 3-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900.
Table 3-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges
Power Input Type Rated Voltage Working Voltage
220 V AC single-phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC
220/380 V AC three-phase 200/346 V AC to 240/415 VAC
176/304 V AC to 290/500 VAC
110 V AC dual-live-wire 100/200 V AC to 120/240 VAC
90/180 V AC to 135/270 VAC
Table 3-2 -48 V DC input voltage range
Power Input Type Rated Voltage
-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Table 3-3 +24 V DC input voltage range
Power Input Type Rated Voltage
+24 V DC +21.6 V DC to +29 V DC
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker andPower Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables for the APM30 and the APM30H (Ver.A). The configurations are based on the maximumconfiguration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. Themaximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combinationof modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. APM is short for advanced power module.APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
Table 3-4 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables when the DBS3900 is configured with an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in an outdoorscenario with AC power supply.
Table 3-4 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables ifthe APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
220 V AC single-phase power
1 x 32 A 4 mm2 or 6 mm2 ≤ 40 m
220 V AC three-phase power
3 x 20 A 2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
2 x 32 A 2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m
Table 3-5 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables when the DBS3900 is configured with a transmission cabinet (TMC) or TMC11H (Ver.A)in an outdoor scenario with DC power supply. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet withheat-exchanger cooler.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Table 3-5 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables ifthe TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
220 V AC single-phase power
Minimum of 1 x 32 Aand maximum of 1 x80 A (both using theone-level magneticblast breaker)
16 mm2 ≤ 15 m
3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker andPower Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables for the APM30H (Ver.B) and the APM30H (Ver.C). The configurations are based on themaximum configuration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet.The maximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximumcombination of modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. APM30H is short foradvanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
In an outdoor scenario with AC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H(Ver.B). Table 3-6 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables in this scenario.
Table 3-6 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables ifthe APM30H (Ver.B) is configured
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
220 V AC single-phase power
Minimum of 1 x 50 Aand maximum of 1 x63 A (both using thetwo-level magneticblast breaker)
6 mm2 ≤ 40 m
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
220 V AC three-phase power
Minimum of 1 x 25 Aand maximum of 1 x32 A (both using thethree-level magneticblast breaker)
2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
In an outdoor scenario with AC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H(Ver.C). Table 3-7 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables in this scenario.
Table 3-7 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables ifthe APM30H (Ver.C) is configured
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
220 V AC single-phase power
1 x 63 A (using thetwo-level magneticblast breaker)
16 mm2 ≤ 40 m
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
1 x 70 A (using thetwo-level magneticblast breaker)
220 V AC three-phase power
1 x 25 A (using thethree-level magneticblast breaker)
4 mm2 ≤ 40 m
In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the TMC11H(Ver.B). Table 3-8 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables in this scenario.
Table 3-8 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables ifthe TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
–48 V DC Minimum of 1 x 32 Aand maximum of 1 x80 A (both using theone-level magneticblast breaker)
25 mm2 ≤ 15 m
In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the TMC11H(Ver.C). Table 3-9 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables in this scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
Table 3-9 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables ifthe TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured
MaximumConfiguration(1)(2)
(3)
MinimumRequirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable
Length ofthe PowerCable
l Four to Six RRUs(power<300 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
≤10 m
l One to ThreeRRUs(power<300 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
l Four to Six RRUs(400 W≤power<560 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
2 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l One to ThreeRRUs (400 W≤power<560 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
l Four to Six RRUs(300 W≤power<400 W)
l One BBU
1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
MaximumConfiguration(1)(2)
(3)
MinimumRequirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable
Length ofthe PowerCable
l Transmissionequipment(power≤350 W)(6)
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l One to ThreeRRUs (300 W≤power<400 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
l Three RRUs(power<300 W)
l Three RRUs (300W≤power<400W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l Three RRUs(power<300 W)
l Three RRUs (400W≤power<560W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l Three RRUs (300W≤power<400W)
l Three RRUs (400W≤power<560W)
1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
MaximumConfiguration(1)(2)
(3)
MinimumRequirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable
Length ofthe PowerCable
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
NOTE
(1) If both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs exist in the same base station, the power configurationfor high-power RRUs will apply for the base station.
(2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximumhigh-power RRUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance withactual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension.
(3) If there are more than six RRUs in the base station, a new DCDU-11B will be needed.
(4) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicablefor the scenarios with lower power consumption.
(5) The circuit breakers with higher capacity is applicable for the scenarios where the circuit breakers withlower capacity can be used. The circuit breaker capacities are ranked as: 160 A > 2 x 80 A > 2 x 63 A >100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(6) If the power consumption of transmission equipment is over 350 W, the corresponding minimumrequirement for the circuit breaker will be enhanced by the additional power consumption.
(7) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met:
l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet.
l The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications.
l The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length.
l When powering on the DBS3900, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turning onthe circuit breakers for all the RRUs. When powering off the DBS3900, turn off the circuit breakersfor all the RRUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.
In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, a heater is required in the TMC series cabinetsfor the DBS3900. In this case, one additional AC power input is required. Table 3-10 lists therecommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Table 3-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesfor the heater
Power Input Type Requirements forCircuit Breakerson CustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of PowerInput Cables
Length of PowerCable
220 V AC single-phase
2 x 5 A 2.5 mm2 ≤15 m
110 V AC dual-live-wire
In an outdoor scenario with +24 V DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with anAPM30H (Ver.B) or an APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-11 lists the recommended configurationsof the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables.
Table 3-11 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesif the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) is configured
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
+24 V DC Minimum of 1 x 160A and maximum of 2x 100 A
2 x 25 mm2 ≤ 15 m
3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for theOMB, IMB03, and IFS06
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables for the outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and indoor floor installationsupport (IFS06). The configurations are based on the maximum configuration of a DBS3900and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. The maximum configuration indicatesthat the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combination of modules and a maximumcombination of cabinets.
In an AC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or IMB03. Table3-12 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesin this scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
Table 3-12 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the OMB orIMB03 is configured with a DBS3900
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
220 V AC single-phase power
Minimum of 1 x 5 Aand maximum of 1 x10 A
2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Table 3-13 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with anDCDU-03B.
Table 3-13 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesin an indoor scenario with DC power supply and DCDU-03B
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreaker forCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
–48 V DC Minimum of 1 x 32 Aand maximum of 1 x80 A (both using theone-level magneticblast breaker)
25 mm2 ≤ 15 m
Table 3-14 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with anDCDU-11B.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Table 3-14 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cablesin an indoor scenario with DC power supply and DCDU-11B
MaximumConfiguration(1)(2)
(3)
MinimumRequirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable
Length ofthe PowerCable
l Four to Six RRUs(power<300 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
≤10 m
l One to ThreeRRUs(power<300 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
l Four to Six RRUs(400 W≤power<560 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
2 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l One to ThreeRRUs (400 W≤power<560 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 80 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
l Four to Six RRUs(300 W≤power<400 W)
l One BBU
1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
MaximumConfiguration(1)(2)
(3)
MinimumRequirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable
Length ofthe PowerCable
l Transmissionequipment(power≤350 W)(6)
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l One to ThreeRRUs (300 W≤power<400 W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for one externalDC power input
l Three RRUs(power<300 W)
l Three RRUs (300W≤power<400W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l Three RRUs(power<300 W)
l Three RRUs (400W≤power<560W)
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
1 x 100 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
l Three RRUs (300W≤power<400W)
l Three RRUs (400W≤power<560W)
1 x 160 A 35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for oneexternal DC power input
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
MaximumConfiguration(1)(2)
(3)
MinimumRequirement forthe CircuitBreaker onCustomerEquipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of thePower Cable
Length ofthe PowerCable
l One BBUl Transmission
equipment(power≤350 W)(6)
2 x 63 A 16 mm2 cables for two externalDC power inputs(7)
NOTE
(1) If both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs exist in the same base station, the power configurationfor high-power RRUs will apply for the base station.
(2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximumhigh-power RRUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance withactual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension.
(3) If there are more than six RRUs in the base station, a new DCDU-11B will be needed.
(4) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicablefor the scenarios with lower power consumption.
(5) The circuit breakers with higher capacity is applicable for the scenarios where the circuit breakers withlower capacity can be used. The circuit breaker capacities are ranked as: 160 A > 2 x 80 A > 2 x 63 A >100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(6) If the power consumption of transmission equipment is over 350 W, the corresponding minimumrequirement for the circuit breaker will be enhanced by the additional power consumption.
(7) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met:
l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet.
l The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications.
l The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length.
l When powering on the DBS3900, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turning onthe circuit breakers for all the RRUs. When powering off the DBS3900, turn off the circuit breakersfor all the RRUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.
3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H(Ver.A)
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an APM30or APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios. APMis short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced power module with aheat-exchanger cooler.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, a power distribution unit (PDU) in theAPM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power to DC power and then distributes the power.
The PDU supplies two AC power inputs and ten DC power inputs.
Figure 3-1and Figure 3-2 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 VAC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-15 lists the specifications of the circuitbreakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
NOTEIn a scenario with a 220 V AC three-phase power supply, the three AC power inputs do not need to beconnected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are thesame as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 3-1 Power distribution scheme for an APM30 in a scenario with the 220 V AC single-phase power supply
Figure 3-2 Power distribution scheme for an APM30 in a scenario with the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply
Figure 3-3and Figure 3-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-15 lists the specifications of thecircuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
Figure 3-3 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.A) in a scenario with a 220 V ACsingle-phase power supply
Figure 3-4 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.A) in a scenario with a 110 V ACdual-live-wire power supply
Table 3-15 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)in an AC power supply scenario
Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPU
Specifications ofAC Output CircuitBreakers
Specifications ofDC Output CircuitBreakers andFuses
220 V AC single-phase or three-phasepower
3 x 16 A (MCB1) l 1 x 10 A for theheater
l 1 x 10 A for theheating film
l 6 x 20 A for theremote radio unit(RRU)
l 1 x 12 A for thebaseband unit(BBU)
l 1 x 12 A for theFAN
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPU
Specifications ofAC Output CircuitBreakers
Specifications ofDC Output CircuitBreakers andFuses
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
2 x 30 A (MCB) l 2 x 4 A for theTM2
NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker
(2) TM: transmission device
In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet.The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmissiondevice, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supplyscenario
Table 3-16 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the ACpower supply scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
Table 3-16 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakers
APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)and a transmission cabinet
220 V AC l 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A(MCB) for thetransmission device
l 1 x 6 A (MCB) for theFAN
Power Distribution Scheme in the –48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioIn a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the external power is supplied to the TMC or the TMC11H(Ver.A), and the direct current distribution unit (DCDU-03B) supplies DC power to the BBU,RRU, fan box, and other components in the cabinet.
Figure 3-6 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A). Table3-17 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Figure 3-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A) in an –48 V DCpower supply scenario
Table 3-17 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) in the –48 VDC power supply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers
TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBUl 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission
device
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) orAPM30H (Ver.C)
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with anAPM30H (Ver.B) or an APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, –48 V DC, and +24 VDC power supply scenarios. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a scenario with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the embedded power supply system(EPS) and embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the cabinet converts AC power to DC powerand distributes the DC power.
The EPS or EPU supplies two AC power outputs:
l One provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four ACpower outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
A power supply unit (PSU) converts the AC power to DC power, which is then supplied to thestorage battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU),and other equipment in the DBS3900.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to beconnected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are thesame as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) inthe 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-18 lists the specifications of thecircuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
Figure 3-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC three-phasepower supply scenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
Figure 3-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wirepower supply scenario
Table 3-18 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the ACpower supply scenario
Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPS
Specifications ofAC Output CircuitBreakers
Specifications ofDC Output CircuitBreakers andFuses
220 V AC single-phase or three-phasepower
3 x 16 A (MCB(1)) l 1 x 16 A (MCB)for the heater andSOU
l 1 x 100 A (MCB)for the BAT(2)
l 6 x 20 A (MCB)for the RRU
l 1 x 25 A (MCB)for the TMC
l 1 x 15 A (FUSE(3)) for the FAN
l 2 x 15 A (FUSE)for the BBU
l 1 x 15 A (FUSE)for the TEC(4).TEC is short forthermoelectriccooling unit.
l TM(5): 4 x 15 A(FUSE)
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
1 x 40 A (MCB) l 1 x 16 A (MCB)for the heater
l 1 x 16 A (MCB)for the SOU
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker
(2) BAT: storage battery
(3) FUSE: fuse
(4) TEC: air conditioner
(5) TM: transmission equipment
Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) inthe 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-19 lists the specifications of thecircuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
Figure 3-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC three-phasepower supply scenario
Figure 3-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Table 3-19 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the ACpower supply scenario
Power Supply Specifications ofUpper-LevelCircuit Breakers ofthe EPS
Specifications ofAC Output CircuitBreakers
Specifications ofDC Output CircuitBreakers andFuses
220 V AC single-phase or three-phasepower
3 x 20 A (MCB) l 1 x 15 A (MCB)for the heater andSOU
l 1 x 160A (MCB)for the BAT
l 6 x 25 A (MCB)for the RRU
l 1 x 30 A (MCB)for the TMC
l 1 x 15 A (FUSE(3)) for the FAN
l 2 x 25 A (FUSE)for the BBU
l 1 x 15 A (FUSE)for the TEC
l 4 x 15 A (FUSE)for the TM
110 V AC dual-live-wire power
1 x 63 A (MCB) l 1 x 15 A (MCB)for the heater
l 1 x 15 A (MCB)for the SOU
In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet.The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmissiondevice, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supplyscenario
Table 3-20 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the ACpower supply scenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Table 3-20 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers
Transmission cabinet l 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A (MCB) for thetransmission device
l 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the FAN
In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet.The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmissiondevice, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supplyscenario
Table 3-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the ACpower supply scenario
Table 3-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers
Transmission cabinet l 2 x 6 A (MCB) + 2 x 12 A (MCB) + 4 x25 A (MCB) for the transmission device
l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN
Power Distribution Scheme in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 can be configured with a TMC11H (Ver.B).The direct current distribution unit (DCDU-03B) supplies DC power to the baseband unit (BBU),remote radio unit (RRU), fan box, and other components.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Figure 3-13 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B). TMC11H is shortfor transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. Table 3-22 lists the specifications of thecircuit breakers.
Figure 3-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the –48 V DC power supplyscenario
Table 3-22 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the –48 V DC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers
TMC11H (Ver.B) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBUl 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission
devicel 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN
In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 can be configured with a TMC11H (Ver.C).The DCDU-11B supplies DC power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components.
Figure 3-14 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 3-23 liststhe specifications of the circuit breakers.
Figure 3-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the –48 V DC power supplyscenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
Table 3-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the –48 V DC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers
TMC11H (Ver.C) l 6 x 25 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5l 2 x 25 A (MCB) for the BBUl 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the transmission
devicel 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN
Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario
In a +24 V DC power supply scenario, the power system (DC/DC) in the APM30H (Ver.B)converts the +24 V DC power to –48 V DC power and supplies the power to the DCDU-03B,which supplies power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components.
Figure 3-15 shows the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 3-24 liststhe specifications of the circuit breakers.
Figure 3-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supplyscenario
Table 3-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Specifications of DC Output CircuitBreakers
Two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBUl 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission
device
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, andIFS06
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an outdoormini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), or an indoor floor installation support (IFS06) inthe 110 V AC, 220 V AC, –48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.
Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a scenario with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the power supply equipment in thecabinet (AC to DC) converts AC power to DC power and distributes the DC power.
Figure 3-16 shows the power distribution schemes for the OMB and IMB03 in the 220 V ACsingle-phase and 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenarios. Table 3-25 lists thespecifications of the circuit breakers and fuses.
Figure 3-16 Power distribution schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios
Table 3-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses
Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakersand Fuses
OMB or IMB03 220 V AC single-phase or110 V AC dual-live-wirepower cable
l 10 A for the baseband unit(BBU) & HEUA
l 20 A for the TMl 20 A for the BATl 12 A for the remote radio
unit (RRU)l 4 A for the TM
Power Distribution Scheme in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
In a –48 V DC power supply scenario, the input power is supplied to the cabinet, and the directcurrent distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) supplies power to the baseband unit (BBU), remoteradio unit (RRU), and other components in the DBS3900.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Figure 3-17 shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB or the IMB03 in a –48 V DCpower supply scenario. Table 3-26 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses inthe DBS3900 in the scenarios.
Figure 3-17 Power distribution scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in a –48 V DC power supplyscenario
Table 3-26 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses
Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakersand Fuses
OMB or IMB03 –48 V DC l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU0 to RRU 5
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for theBBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for thetransmission device
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for theFAN
Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply ScenarioIn a +24 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06.The power supply system (DC to DC) in the IMB03 converts the +24 V DC power to –48 V DCpower and supplies power to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B supplies power to the BBU andRRU.
Figure 3-18 shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03. Table 3-27 lists thespecifications of the circuit breakers.
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
Figure 3-18 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supplyscenario
Table 3-27 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC powersupply scenario
Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DCOutput Circuit Breakers
One IMB03 and one IFS06 +24 V DC l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU0 to RRU 5
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for theBBU
l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for thetransmission device
BBU3900Hardware Description 3 DBS3900 Power System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
About This Chapter
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in thecabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU andUEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components toachieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
4.1 BBU Monitoring PortThe BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input portsand two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs.
4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)The advanced power module (APM30) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet are monitoredby various boards. The boards manage the cabinet by collecting alarms from components suchas sensors and fans and by using the RS485 serial bus to transmit the alarm signals to the MONport on the baseband unit (BBU). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)The APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet are monitored by variousboards. The boards manage the cabinets by collecting alarms from components such as sensorsand fans and then using the RS485 serial bus to transmit alarm signals to MON ports on thebaseband unit (BBU).
4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06The outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and the indoor floor installation support(IFS06) are monitored by different boards. The boards or modules report the alarms fromcomponents such as sensors and fans to the baseband unit (BBU).
4.5 Customized Alarm InputWhen an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to theBBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
4.1 BBU Monitoring PortThe BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input portsand two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs.
Figure 4-1 shows the slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU.
Figure 4-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU
Table 4-1 lists the ports on the UPEU and UEIU.
Table 4-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU
Slot Board Port Connector Quantity Description
Slot19 UPEU EXT-ALM0 RJ45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 0 to 3
EXT-ALM1 RJ45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ45connector
1 Port forRS485 input0
MON1 RJ45connector
1 Port forRS485 input1
Slot18 UEIU(optional)
EXT-ALM0 RJ45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 0 to 3
EXT-ALM1 RJ45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ45connector
1 Port forRS485 input0
MON1 RJ45connector
1 Port forRS485 input1
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)The advanced power module (APM30) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet are monitoredby various boards. The boards manage the cabinet by collecting alarms from components suchas sensors and fans and by using the RS485 serial bus to transmit the alarm signals to the MONport on the baseband unit (BBU). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
Monitoring Schemes of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power SupplyScenario
NOTEIf a DBS3900 is configured with an APM30 or an APM30H (Ver.A), the DBS3900 can work only in asingle-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Figure 4-2 shows the monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is configured in anAPM30 and the DBS3900 is configured with one APM30, one transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler (TMC), and one backup battery cabinet (BBC) or with APM30s, one TMC,and two BBCs. For details about the equipment monitored by the APM power monitor unitinterface board (APMI) and APM fan monitor unit interface board (AFMU), see descriptions ofthe APMI and AFMU.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power monitoring unit (PMU),
see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30.
Figure 4-2 Monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
APMI APMI
PMU AFMU
AFMU
BBC BBC
APM30 APM30
TMC
BBU
APMI
PMU AFMU
Door Status Sensor
Door Status Sensor
Door Status Sensor
Door Status Sensor
Door Status Sensor
APMI
PMU AFMU
AFMU
BBC
APM30
TMC
BBU
Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarmsignal cable on the DCDU
Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarmsignal cable on the DCDU
APMI
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
MON0 / MON1ALM0/ALM1
TX RX
RS232/RS422
Figure 4-3 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is configured in anAPM30H (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC(Ver.A), and one BBC or one integrated battery backup system (IBBS) or with two APM30Hs,one TMC, and two BBCs or two IBBSs. For details about the equipment monitored by the heatexchange unit type A (HEUA) and HERT power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), seedescriptions of the boards. HERT refers to the Huawei Enhanced Radio Technology.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU isconfigured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Figure 4-3 Monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.A)
HPMI
PMU HEUA
BBC/IBBS
APM30H(Ver.A)
TMC11H(Ver.A)
BBU
HEUA
HPMI
PMU HEUA
BBC/IBBS
APM30H(Ver.A)
TMC11H(Ver.A)
BBU
HEUA
HPMI
PMU HEUA
BBC/IBBS
APM30H(Ver.A)
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
Door status sensor
Door status sensor
Door status sensor
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
COMBAT
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
RS232/RS422
Monitoring Schemes of the DBS3900 in the –48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
Figure 4-4 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in one TMCor a TMC11H (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 is configured with two TMCs or two TMC11Hs(Ver.A). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler version A.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the central monitoring unit type A(CMUA), see CMUA.
Figure 4-4 Monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC orTMC11H (Ver.A)
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H
COM_IN / COM1
MON0 / MON1
BBU
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C)
The APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet are monitored by variousboards. The boards manage the cabinets by collecting alarms from components such as sensorsand fans and then using the RS485 serial bus to transmit alarm signals to MON ports on thebaseband unit (BBU).
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
Monitoring Scheme of a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base StationOnly one BBU is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode base station and the BBU is installedin the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). If two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C)are configured, the BBU is installed in the basic APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), whichis on the left.
The central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) is configured in the APM30H (Ver.B) and thecentral monitoring unit type E (CMUE) is configured in the APM30H (Ver.C). The monitoringschemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are the same. For details of theequipment monitored by the CMUA, CMUE, and the HERT power monitoring interface unit(HPMI), see the descriptions of CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI. HERT is short for Huawei EnhancedRadio Technology.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is
configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see
Power Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-5 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)or APM30H (Ver.C) housing the BBU, one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and oneIBBS or with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H(Ver.C), and two IBBSs.
Figure 4-5 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS
PMU
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
COM_485
COM
TO PMU DB50
MON0 / MON1
BBU
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
BBU
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI HPMI
PMU PMU
CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE CMUA/CMUE
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
Figure 4-6 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)or APM30H (Ver.C) housing the BBU, one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and twoIBBSs or with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H(Ver.C), and four IBBSs.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
Figure 4-6 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) orAPM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs
PMU
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
BBU
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
IBBSIBBS
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
BBU
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
IBBSIBBS
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
HPMI
PMU
HPMI COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
COM_485
COM
TO PMU DB50
MON0 / MON1
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
Figure 4-7 shows the monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) that only supplies power to and monitor RRUs.
Figure 4-7 Monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) orAPM30H (Ver.C) that only supplies power to and monitor RRUs
Figure 4-8 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11H (Ver.B)or TMC11H (Ver.C) housing the BBU.
Figure 4-8 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11H (Ver.B) orTMC11H (Ver.C) housing the BBU
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
Figure 4-9 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a +24 VDC APM30H (Ver.B).
Figure 4-9 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the +24 V DCAPM30H (Ver.B)
ALM
PRESENT
COM_IN APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1MON0 / MON1
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
BBU
CMUA
Power System(DC/DC)
Monitoring Scheme of a Triple-Mode Base StationIn a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. The basic BBU is BBU0 and is configuredin 0# APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. The extension BBU is BBU1 and isconfigured in 1# APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. All the monitoringequipment is connected to BBU0 instead of BBU1, which is the same as in a single-mode ordual-mode scenario, as shown in Figure 4-10, Figure 4-11, and Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-10 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) orAPM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
Figure 4-11 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) orAPM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and four IBBSs
Figure 4-12 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with the TMC11H (Ver.B)orTMC11H (Ver.C)
4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06The outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and the indoor floor installation support(IFS06) are monitored by different boards. The boards or modules report the alarms fromcomponents such as sensors and fans to the baseband unit (BBU).
Monitoring Scheme of a DBS3900 in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode ScenarioNOTEFor details about the equipment monitored, see descriptions of the monitoring boards or modules.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA), see
HEUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power monitoring unit (PMU), see PMU.
The PMU is configured only in the lower IMB03.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power system (DC/DC), see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).
Figure 4-13 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in anOMB in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 4-14 shows the monitoring
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a –48 V DC power supplyscenario.
Figure 4-13 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 4-14 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 4-15 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, remoteradio units (RRUs), and IMB03 in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. In thisscenario, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely.
Figure 4-15 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and IMB03in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
RS232/RS485
IMB03
MON0 / MON1 BBU
PMU
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
If the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and indoor centralized rack (ICR), the BBUis installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06. Figure 4-16 shows themonitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the 110 V ACor 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 4-17 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 4-16 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR inthe 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
COM_IN / COM1
IMB03
IMB03
MON0 / MON1BBU
PMU
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
Figure 4-17 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR inthe +24 V DC power supply scenario
ALM
PRESENT
IMB03
IMB03
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1BBU
Power System(DC/DC)
Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination
Monitoring Scheme of the DBS3900 in a Triple-Mode ScenarioNOTEIf the DBS3900 is configured with the OMB or with the BBU, RRUs, and IMB03, the DBS3900 does notwork in triple mode. If the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR, the DBS3900 can workin triple mode.
In triple mode, if the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR, two BBUs arerequired. BBU0 is configured in 0#IMB03 and BBU1 is configured in 3#IMB03. BBU0 monitorsequipment in 0#IMB03 and 1#IMB03 and BBU1 monitors equipment in 2#IMB03 and3#IMB03, as shown in Figure 4-18 and Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-18 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR inthe 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 4-19 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR inthe –48 V DC power supply scenario
4.5 Customized Alarm InputWhen an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to theBBU.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:
l The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
l The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see therelated initial configuration guide.
Monitoring Board ConfigurationIf a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported tothe BBU. The configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900 depend on the number ofcustomized alarms, as listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900
External PowerInput
ApplicationScenario
Number ofBoolean Signals tobe Monitored
Monitoring BoardConfiguration
-48 V DC/220 V AC Indoor DBS3900 None UPEU
1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU
17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU+EMUA
Outdoor DBS3900 None UPEU
1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU+(2xUSLP2+SLPU)
17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU+EMUA
NOTE
l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs rather than UPEU+UEIU are configured.
l The analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA.
l Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package.
l The EMUA with sensors is configured according to site requirements for the indoor DBS3900.
Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIUEach UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of twoUPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU, which means there are 16 Booleanalarm inputs. This method can be used for the configuration of less than 16 customized alarminputs.
If using this method, connect the device to be monitored to the SLPU for surge protection, andthen connect the device to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure 4-20.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
Figure 4-20 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPUand then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU through the alarm cable forthe BBU. Table 4-3 describes the relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number ofcustomized alarms.
Table 4-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number ofcustomized alarms
Pins oftheIN0 toIN3ports
USLP2 in the upper slot USLP2 in the lower slot
IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3
1 4+ 5+ 0+ 1+ 12+ 13+ 8+ 9+
2 4-(GND)
5-(GND)
0-(GND)
1-(GND)
12-(GND)
13-(GND)
8-(GND)
9-(GND)
3 6-(GND)
7+ 2-(GND)
3+ 14-(GND)
15+ 10-(GND)
11+
4 6+ 7-(GND)
2+ 3-(GND)
14+ 15-(GND)
10+ 11-(GND)
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 8.8.5 USLP2. For details about the wire sequence ofthe BBU alarm cable, see 7.20 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTEThe SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signalprotection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot.In this case, the USLP2 in the upper slot of the SLPU is not used.
Customized Alarms Collected by the EMUA
The EMUA can be configured for the DBS3900 that requires more than 16 Boolean alarmsignals. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMUreports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port.For details about cable connections, see Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-21 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)
SENSOR
Customized alarms are collected by the EMUA, transferred by the PMU, and then reported tothe CMUA. Finally, the alarms are transferred to the RRU through the MON port, achievingalarm monitoring on the RRU. For detailed cable connections, see Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2)
COM_IN
ALM
COM_IN
RS485
COM_OUT
COM_OUT
PMU
RRU
CMUA
EMUA
SENSOR
For details about the position of the input port on the EMUA and cable connection between theEMUA and the sensor, see EMUA User Guide.
BBU3900Hardware Description 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
5 BBU3900 Equipment
About This Chapter
This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.
The BBU3900 has the following functions:
l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC/RNCl Provides CPRI ports for the communication with the RF modulesl Provides USB ports, which facilitates automatic base station upgrade by allowing a USB
disk to be used for software installation and data configurationl Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000l Processes uplink and downlink datal Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processingl Provides the system clock
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions (W x D x H) of the BBU3900 are 442 mm x 310 mm x 86 mm. Figure 5-1shows the BBU3900.
Figure 5-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is unique to a network element (NE) for identification, andis used during the commissioning of the base station.l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a label and the mounting
ears of the BBU. Figure 5-2 shows the position of the ESN.
Figure 5-2 The position of the ESN (1)
l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the mounting earsof the BBU. Figure 5-3 shows the position of the ESN.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
Figure 5-3 The position of the ESN (2)
5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.
5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900This section describes slot assignment of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafter referredto as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referred to asLO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to as GL),UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL), (GSM+UMTS)+(LTE Only) (hereinafter referredto as GU+LO), (GSM+LTE)+(UMTS Only) (hereinafter referred to as GL+UO) scenarios.
Slots of the BBU3900
The slot assignment of the BBU3900 in GO mode, BBU3900 in GU mode, BBU3900 in UOmode, BBU3900 in LO mode, BBU3900 in GL mode, BBU3900 in UL mode, BBU3900 in GU+LO mode, and BBU3900 in GL+UO mode are the same, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Slots of the BBU3900
BBU3900 Working in GO Mode
Table 5-1 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GOmode.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
Table 5-1 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GO mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 1 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1.The 1 U GPS/GLONASSreceiver isconfigured inslot 1 (with slots0 and 1occupied).
UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
Figure 5-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GO mode.
Figure 5-5 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GO mode
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
BBU3900 Working in UO ModeTable 5-2 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UOmode.
Table 5-2 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UO mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
WMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single WMPTis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
WBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more
CPRI portsare required,the WBBP ispreferentially configuredin slot 3 or 2indescendingorder ofpriority.
l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP ispreferentially configuredin slot 3, 0, 1,2, 4, or 5 indescendingorder ofpriority.
If a WBBPd isrequired, it ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 3 or 2 indescendingorder of priority.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat two WBBPsare installed inslots 2 and 3. Atleast, one of thetwo WBBPs isWBBPd.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 4 Slots 0, 1, 4, and5
It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4, 5, 0, or 1in descendingorder of priority.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or 0 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1.The 1 U GPS/GLONASSreceiver isconfigured inslot 1 (with slots0 and 1occupied).
Figure 5-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UMTS Only mode.
Figure 5-6 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UO mode
BBU3900 Working in LO ModeTable 5-3 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in LOmode.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
Table 5-3 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in LO mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
LMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or 7 A single LMPTis configured inslot 7.
LBBP Mandatory 6 Slots 0 to 5 A single LBBPis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.The priorities ofslot assignmentare as follows:slot 3, slot 2, slot1, slot 0, slot 4,slot 5.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis configuredonly in slot 19.
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5 A single USCUis preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5. A USCUthat occupies 1U space isconfigured inslots 5 and 4.If slots 4 and 5are occupied, asingle USCU isconfigured inslot 1. In thissituation, aUSCU thatoccupies 1 Uspace isconfigured inslots 1 and 0.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
Figure 5-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in LO mode.
Figure 5-7 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in LO mode
BBU3900 Working in GU ModeTable 5-4 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GUmode.
Table 5-4 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
WBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 It is configuredin slot 3 bydefault.l If more
CPRI portsare required,the WBBP ispreferentially configuredin slot 3 or 2indescendingorder ofpriority.
l If no moreCPRI portsare required,the WBBP ispreferentially configuredin slot 3, 2, 0,1, or 4 indescendingorder ofpriority.
If a WBBPd isrequired, it ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 3 or 2 indescendingorder of priority.If five or moreWBBPs arerequired, ensurethat two WBBPsare installed inslots 2 and 3. Atleast, one of thetwo WBBPs isWBBPd.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis configuredonly in slot 19.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The slot priorityof the GO UTRPis higher thanthat of the UOUTRP.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.
UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -
Figure 5-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode.
Figure 5-8 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode
BBU3900 Working in GL Mode
Table 5-5 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GLmode.
Table 5-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6(with slots 5 and6 occupied).
LBBP Mandatory 5 Slots 0 to 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 3.The priorities ofslot assignmentare as follows:slot 3, slot 2, slot1, slot 0, slot 4
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis configuredonly in slot 19.
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4, 0, or 1 indescendingorder of priority.The slot priorityof the GO UTRPis higher thanthat of the LOUTRP.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 1.The 1 U GPS/GLONASSreceiver isconfigured inslot 1 (with slots0 and 1occupied).
UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
Figure 5-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GL mode.
Figure 5-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in GL mode
BBU3900 Working in UL ModeTable 5-6 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in ULmode.
Table 5-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 It is configuredonly in slot 6.
WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 It is configuredonly in slot 7.
LBBP Mandatory 5 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or5
A single LBBPis configuredonly in slot 2. Ifmore LBBPs arerequired, theLBBP ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 2, 0, 1, 4, or5 in descendingorder of priority.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
InstallationSlot
Remarks
WBBP Mandatory 4 Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or5
A single WBBPis configuredonly in slot 3. Ifmore LBBPs arerequired, theWBBP ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 3, 0, 1, 4, or5 in descendingorder of priority.If a WBBPd isrequired, it isconfigured onlyin slot 3.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 It is configuredonly in slot 16.
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or 19 A single UPEUis configuredonly in slot 19.
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.The slot priorityof the UO UTRPis higher thanthat of the LOUTRP.
USCU Optional 1 Slot 4 or 5 It ispreferentiallyconfigured inslot 4.
Figure 5-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UL mode.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
Figure 5-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in UL mode
BBU3900 Working in GU+LO ModeBBU3900 Working in GU Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in theBBU3900 working in GU mode.
BBU3900 Working in LO Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in theBBU3900 working in LO mode.
BBU3900 Working in GL+UO ModeBBU3900 Working in GL Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in theBBU3900 working in GL mode.
BBU3900 Working in UO Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in theBBU3900 working in UO mode.
5.2.2 WMPTThe WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes thesignals and manages the resources for other boards.
PanelFigure 5-11 shows the panel of the WMPT.
Figure 5-11 Panel of the WMPT
FunctionsThe WMPT has the following functions:
l Provides Operation and Maintenance (OM) functions such as configuration management,equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active/standby switchover and provides OM channels connected to the OMC (LMT or M2000)
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
l Provides the reference clockl Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900l Provides USB ports, one of which facilitates automatic base station upgraded when a USB
disk is inserted during software installation and data configurationl Provides four E1s/T1s which support ATM and IP protocolsl Provides one FE electrical port and one FE optical port which support the IP protocol
LEDsTable 5-7 describes the LEDs on the WMPT panel.
Table 5-7 LEDs on the WMPT panel
Label Color Status Meaning
RUN Green ON The power input isavailable, but theboard is faulty.
OFF The power supply isunavailable.
1s ON and 1s OFF The board in normalconfiguration isrunning properly.
0.125s ON and0.125s OFF
The software is beingloaded to the board,or the board is not inuse.
ALM Red OFF No alarm isgenerated.
ON The board has alarmson hardware.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is instandby mode.
In addition to the previous three LEDs, the WMPT has another six LEDs indicating theconnection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and the commissioning Ethernet port.The six LEDs have no silk screen and are on both sides of each of the three ports. Figure 5-12shows the LEDs beside the three ports.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
Figure 5-12 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT
Table 5-8 describes the LEDs and their status.
Table 5-8 LEDs and their status
LED Color Status Meaning
LEDs beside the FE1optical port
Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.
OFF The connections arefaulty.
Green (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.
OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.
LEDs beside the FE0electrical port
Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.
OFF The connections arefaulty.
Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.
OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.
ETH Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.
OFF The connections arefaulty.
Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.
OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.
Ports
Table 5-9 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
Table 5-9 Ports on the WMPT panel
Label Connector Type Description
E1/T1 DB26 connector E1/T1 port
FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port
FE1 SFP connector FE optical port
GPS SMA connector Obligate
ETH RJ45 connector Commissioning Ethernetport
USB USB connector USB loading port
TST USB connector USB testing port
RST - Resetting the BBU
DIP SwitchesThe WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 for setting the E1/T1 working mode and SW2 for settingthe protection grounding for the E1/T1 cables receiving 4-way signals. Figure 5-13 shows theDIP switches on the WMPT.
Figure 5-13 DIP switches on the WMPT
Table 5-10 and Table 5-11 describe the settings of SW1 and SW2.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
Table 5-10 Settings of SW1
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1 Mode
OFF OFF ON ON The E1impedance isset to 120ohms.
ON ON ON ON The E1impedance isset to 75ohms.
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
Table 5-11 Settings of SW2
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode
ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
CAUTIONAll the DIP bits of SW2 are set to OFF by default. When four E1 links are faulty, you shouldset all the DIP bits of SW2 to ON so that the faults are rectified.
5.2.3 GTMUThe GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basictransmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenanceport, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and managesthe entire base station.
PanelThe GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
Figure 5-14 GTMU panel
Figure 5-15 GTMUb panel
Functions
The GTMU and GTMUb have the following functions:
l Controls and manages the base stationl Supports fault management system, configuration management system, performance
management system, and security management systeml Monitors the fans and power modulesl Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized model Provides the clock output for testl Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM systeml Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEsl Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUsl The GTMUb supports interconnected BBUs.
LEDs
Table 5-12 describes the LEDs on the GTMU.
Table 5-12 LEDs on the GTMU
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON The board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
LED Color Status Description
ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board is running properly.
ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s
The board is being tested.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
Software is being loaded to theboard.
ALM Red ON An alarm is generated,indicating a running fault.
OFF The board is running properly.
ACT Green ON The board is in the active state.
OFF The board is in the standby state.
Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FEoptical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port and commissioning port. Each of the LEDs ispositioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 5-13 describesthe LEDs and their status.
Table 5-13 LEDs and their status
LED Color Status Description
LIU0 to LIU3 Green ON The link is in the idlestate.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
An E1/T1 remotealarm is generated.
OFF The link isfunctional.
CPRI0 to CPRI5 Green ON The CPRI link isfunctional.
Red ON The optical modulefails to receivesignals.
ETH Green (LINK LEDon the left)
ON The connection is setup successfully.
OFF No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT LEDon the right)
Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
LED Color Status Description
OFF No data is beingtransmitted.
FE0 Green (LINK LEDon the left)
ON The connection is setup successfully.
OFF No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT LEDon the right)
Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
OFF No data is beingtransmitted.
FE1(GTMUb) Green (LINK LEDon the left)
ON The connection is setup successfully.
OFF No connection is setup.
Green (ACT LED onthe right)
Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
OFF No data is beingtransmitted.
M_S (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of thereserved port.
EXT (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of thereserved port.
PortsTable 5-14 describes the ports on the GTMU.
Table 5-14 Ports on the GTMU
Label Connector Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU.It supports the input and output of optical andelectrical transmission signals
EXT (GTMUb) SFP female Obligate
ETH RJ45 connector Local maintenance and debugging port
FE0 RJ45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough FE cables to transmit networkinformation
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
Label Connector Description
FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough optical cables to transmit networkinformation
USB USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through theUSB disk
TST USB connector Provides a reference clock for the tester
E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector
Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs betweenthe GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs
The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.
DIP Switches
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 andS2 must be set together. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:
l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 5-15 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 cables. Table 5-16 provides details onthe DIP switch.
l S3 is reserved.
l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 5-17 provides details on the DIP switch.
l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 5-18 provides detailson the DIP switch.
Table 5-15 Details of the DIP Switch S1
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to75 ohm.
OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to120 ohm.
ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to100 ohm.
Others Unavailable
NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept as out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
Table 5-16 Details of the DIP Switch S2
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF By default, all the DIPbits of S2 are set to OFFin all the modes.
ON ON ON ON When the four E1 RXlinks in 75 ohm haveerrors, all the bits of S2must be set to ON torectify the faults on theE1 links.
Others Unavailable
Table 5-17 Details of the DIP Switch S4
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass
OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1bypass
Others Unavailable
Table 5-18 Details of the DIP Switch S5
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1bypass
OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-1 cascadedbase stations
ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-2 cascadedbase stations
OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-3 cascadedbase stations
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-4 cascadedbase stations
OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-5 cascadedbase stations
5.2.4 LMPTThe LTE Main Processing & Transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system interms of OM and signaling processing and provides the clock for the BBU3900.
PanelFigure 5-16 shows the LMPT.
Figure 5-16 LMPT
TX
SFP 0
RX TX
SFP 1
RX
USB TST ETH FE/GE0 FE/GE1GPSRST
RUNALMACT
LMPT
LMPTb
FunctionsThe LMPT has the following functions:
l Enabling configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,signaling processing, and radio source management
l Enabling control for the boards in the systeml Providing the system clockl Enabling signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW
LEDsThere are three LEDs on the panel of the LMPT. Table 5-19 describes the LEDs on the LMPT.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Table 5-19 LEDs on the panel of the LMPT
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On The board is powered on butit is faulty.
Off There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
Blinking (on for1s and off for 1s)
Data is being loaded to theboard, the board is notstarted, or the board isrunning in a secure version.
Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The board is being loaded,the board is not started, orthe board is runningproperly.
ALM Red On An alarm is reported,indicating a fault in theboard.
Off The board is workingproperly.
Blinking (on for1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, andthe alarm may be caused byan associated board or portfault. Therefore, you mustlocate the fault beforereplacing the board.
ACT Green On The board works in activemode.
Off The board works in standbymode.
Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The OML link is disrupted.
Blinking (on for1s and off for 1s)
The board is being tested,such as an RRU VoltageStanding Wave Ratio(VSWR) test through aUSB disk. When anupgrade through a USBdisk is implemented, theACT LED does not blink.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
Besides the preceding three LEDs, some other LEDs used for indicating the connection statusof the FE optical port, FE electrical port, commissioning Ethernet port have no silkscreen on theboard. They are near the ports. Table 5-20 describes the LEDs.
Table 5-20 Ports and LEDs
Label Color Status Description
SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) On The connection is setup successfully.
Off No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
Off No data is beingtransmitted.
ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
Off No data is beingtransmitted.
Green (LINK) On The connection is setup successfully.
Off No connection is setup.
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) On The connection is setup successfully.
Off No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
Off No data is beingtransmitted.
PortTable 5-21 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Table 5-21 Ports on the panel of the LMPT
Label Connector Type Quantity Application
SFP0 and SFP1 LC 2 FE/GE optical port,used for connectingtransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment
USB USB 1 Software loading
TST USB 1 Testing
ETH RJ45 connector 1 Commissioning
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 FE/GE electrical port,used for connectingtransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment
GPS SMA 1 Receiving GPS signals
RST - 1 Resetting theBBU3900
NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input or output. Therefore, they are not usedsimultaneously.SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are not usedsimultaneously.
5.2.5 WBBPThe WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
PanelThe WBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 5-17, Figure 5-18, and Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-17 Panel of the WBBPa
Figure 5-18 Panel of the WBBPb
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
Figure 5-19 Panel of the WBBPd
Function
The WBBP has the following functions:
l Provides the CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RF module, andsupports the CPRI interface in 1+1 backup mode.
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
l The WBBPd supports the IC function of uplink data when installed in slot 2 or slot 3.
Table 5-22 describes the specifications of the WBBP.
NOTEThe baseband board in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Table 5-22 Specifications of the WBBP
Board Number ofCells
Number of ULCEs
Number of DLCEs
BasebandTransferCapacity
WBBPa 3 128 256 N/A
WBBPb1 3 64 64 Twelve 1T2Rcells
WBBPb2 3 128 128 Twelve 1T2Rcells
WBBPb3 6 256 256 Twelve 1T2Rcells
WBBPb4 6 384 384 Twelve 1T2Rcells
WBBPd1 6 192 192 Twenty-four1T2R cells
WBBPd2 6 384 384 Twenty-four1T2R cells
WBBPd3 6 256 256 Twenty-four1T2R cells
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the WBBP. Table 5-23 describes the LEDs on the WBBPand their status.
Table 5-23 LEDs on the panel of the WBBP and their status
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
Off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for1s)
The board is running properly.
On for 0.125s and off for0.125s
Software is being loaded to theboard.
ACT Green On The board is running.
Off The board is not in use.
ALM Red Off The board is running properly.
On The board has a hardware alarm.
The WBBPa and the WBBPb both provide three LEDs indicating the status of the Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) links, which are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDsindicating the status of the SFP links, which are above the SFP ports.
Table 5-24 describes the LEDs.
Table 5-24 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links
Label Color Status Description
TX RX Red/green Off No cable isconnected to theoptical module, orthe optical module ispowered off.
Steady green The CPRI link isfunctional, and theRF module has nohardware faulty.
Steady red The optical module isnot in position, or theCPRI link is faulty.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
Label Color Status Description
Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The RF module onthe CPRI link has ahardware fault, andthe RF module needsto be replaced.
Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)
A VSWR alarm,antenna alarm, orexternal alarm isgenerated on the RFunit on the CPRI link.
PortsTable 5-25 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.
Table 5-25 Ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb
Label Connector Type Description
CPRIx SFP female Data transmission portinterconnected to the RFmodule. It supports the inputand output of optical andelectrical transmissionsignals.
Table 5-26 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.
Table 5-26 Ports on the panel of the WBBPd
Label Connector Type Description
CPRI0, CPRI1,CPRI2, CPRI3/EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,CPRI5/EIH2
SFP female Data transmission portinterconnected to the RF module.It supports the input and output ofoptical and electricaltransmission signals.
5.2.6 LBBPThe LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.
PanelThe LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-21.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Figure 5-20 Panel of the LBBPb
CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RXLBBP RUNALMACT
LBBPb
Figure 5-21 Panel of the LBBPc
CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RXLBBP RUNALMACT
LBBPc
NOTEThe LBBPc can be used in both LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes, and the LBBPb can be used in only LTEFDD mode.
Function
The LBBP has the following functions:l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signalsl Provides CPRI ports connected to RF modules
Table 5-27 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE FDD mode.
Table 5-27 Specifications of the LBBP
Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell
AntennaConfiguration
LBBPb 3 10M 2T2R
1 20M 2T2R
1 10M 4T4R
LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R
3 10M 4T4R
1 20M 4T4R
Table 5-28 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE TDD mode.
Table 5-28 Specifications of the LBBP
Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell
AntennaConfiguration
LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell
AntennaConfiguration
3 10M 4T4R
1 20M 4T4R
1 10M/20M 8T8R
LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LBBP. Table 5-29 describes the LEDs on the LBBP.
Table 5-29 LEDs on the LBBP
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On The board is poweredon but is faulty.
Off The board is notpowered on, or it isfaulty.
On for 1s and off for1s
The board is runningproperly.
On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
Data is being loadedto the board, or theboard is not started.
ALM Red On An alarm isgenerated, and theboard must bereplaced.
Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)
An alarm isgenerated, and thealarm may be causedby an associatedboard or port fault.Therefore, you mustidentify the faultbefore replacing theboard.
Off The board is runningproperly.
ACT Green On The board works inactive mode.
Off The board works instandby mode.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
The LBBP provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positionedabove the SFP ports. Table 5-30 describes the LEDs.
Table 5-30 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links
Label Color Status Description
TX RX Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link isavailable.
Steady red The optical modulemay fail to send orreceive signals. (Thefailure may be causedby a faulty opticalmodule ordisconnected opticalfiber.)
Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The RF unit in theCPRI link has ahardware fault.
Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is outof lock (The fault maybe caused by mutuallock of dual-modeclock sources ormismatched data rateover CPRI interfaces,and you are advised tocheck the systemconfiguration) or theVSWR alarm isreported on the RRUsin the CPRI link(because the USBstorage disk is undertest).
Off The SFP module is notin position or theoptical module ispowered off.
PortTable 5-31 describes the ports on the panel of the LBBP.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
Table 5-31 Ports on the LBBP
Label Connector Quantity Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 The CPRI portsconnect to theLRRUs or LRFUsfor transmittingservice data, clocksignals, andsynchronizationinformation
5.2.7 FANThe FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of thefan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
PanelsThe FAN unit has two types of exterior, which are shown in Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-22 FAN panel
Figure 5-23 FANc panel
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
NOTEThe FANc has FANc label, which is different from the FAN.
FunctionsThe FAN unit performs the following functions:l Controls the fan speed.l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.l Monitors the temperature at the air inlet.l Dissipates heat.l The FANc supports the function of reading and writing the information reported by the
electronic label unit.
LEDThe FAN panel has only one LED, which indicates the operating status of the fans. Table5-32 describes the LED.
Table 5-32 LED on the FAN panel
Label Color State Meaning
STATE Green On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
The module is notregistered, and noalarm is reported.
On for 1s and off for1s
The module isrunning properly.
Red Off No alarm isgenerated.
On for 1s and off for1s
The unit is reportingalarms.
5.2.8 UPEUA universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts –48 VDC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.
PanelUPEUs fall into three types: universal power and environment interface unit type A (UPEUa),universal power and environment interface unit type B (UPEUb), and universal power andenvironment interface unit type C (UPEUc). The UPEUa and UPEUc convert –48 V DC powerinto +12 V DC power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure5-24, Figure 5-25, and Figure 5-26 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, and UPEUcrespectively.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
Figure 5-24 Panel of the UPEUa
(1) BBU power switch
Figure 5-25 Panel of the UPEUb
(1) BBU power switch
Figure 5-26 Panel of the UPEUc
(1) BBU power switch
NOTEThe UPEUa can be distinguished from the UPEUb by observing the silkscreen on the panel. The silkscreenon the UPEUa is –48V and the silkscreen on the UPEUb is +24V. The UPEUa can also be distinguishedfrom the UPEUc because a UPEUc label is on the UPEUc.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
FunctionThe UPEU performs the following functions:l Converts –48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the only operating
voltage of the BBU.l Provides ports for two RS485 signal inputs and eight Boolean signal inputs. The Boolean
signal inputs can be dry contact type or open collector (OC) type.
Table 5-33 lists the specifications of the UPEUs.
Table 5-33 Specifications of the UPEUs
Board Output Power Backup
UPEUa A UPEUa has an outputpower of 300 W.
1+1 backup
UPEUc A UPEUc has an outputpower of 360 W and twoUPEUc boards have a totaloutput power of 650 W.
1+1 backup
UPEUa+UPEUc A UPEUa and a UPEUc havea total output power of 360W.
-
NOTEIf a UPEUa is replaced with a UPEUc, the power consumption changes in the monitoring of the powerconsumption on the M2000. The monitoring result of the power consumption varies depending on theoutput power and the sampling method. In this situation, the UPEUc and the UPEUa adopt differentsampling methods and therefore the monitored power consumption may decrease after a UPEUa is replacedwith a UPEUc.
IndicatorThe UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 5-34 liststhe indications of the indicator in different status.
Table 5-34 Indicator on the UPEU
Silkscreen Color Status Indication
RUN Green Steady on The board isfunctional.
Off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
PortA UPEU provides ports for two RS485 signal inputs and eight Boolean signal inputs. Figure5-27 shows the positions of UPEUs in the BBU.
Figure 5-27 Positions of UPEUs in the BBU
Table 5-35 describes the ports on the UPEU.
Table 5-35 Ports
Slot Silkscreen
Connector Type
Quantity Remarks
Slot 19 +24V or –48V
3V3connector
1 +24 V DC or –48 V DC power input
EXT-ALM0
RJ45connector
1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3
EXT-ALM1
RJ45connector
1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ45connector
1 Port for RS485 signal input 0
MON1 RJ45connector
1 Port for RS485 signal input 1
Slot 18 +24V or –48V
3V3connector
1 +24 V DC or –48 V DC power input
EXT-ALM0
RJ45connector
1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3
EXT-ALM1
RJ45connector
1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ45connector
1 Port for RS485 signal input 0
MON1 RJ45connector
1 Port for RS485 signal input 1
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
5.2.9 UEIUThe Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals fromthe external devices to the main control and transmission unit.
PanelFigure 5-28 shows the panel of the UEIU.
Figure 5-28 Panel of the UEIU
FunctionsThe UEIU performs the following functions:l Provides two ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal.l Provides two ports, each transmitting four Boolean signals. The Boolean signal inputs can
be dry contact type or open collector (OC) type.l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
and transmission unit.
PortsThe UEIU is configured in slot 18. It provides four ports with two ports transmitting two RS485input signals and the other two ports transmitting eight Boolean signals.
Table 5-36 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.
Table 5-36 Ports on the panel of the UEIU
Slot Label Connector
Quantity
Description
slot 18 EXT-ALM0
RJ-45 1 No.0 to 3 Boolean signal input ports
EXT-ALM1
RJ-45 1 No.4 to 7 Boolean signal input ports
MON0 RJ-45 1 No.0 RS485 signal input port
MON1 RJ-45 1 No.1 RS485 signal input port
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
5.2.10 UTRPThis describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmissionextension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.
SpecificationTable 5-37 describes the specifications of the UTRP.
Table 5-37 Specifications of the UTRP
Board Sub-board/BoardType
Port Mode
UTRP2 UEOC Two universal FE/GE optical port
UMTS
UTRP3 UAEC Ports for eightchannels of ATMover E1/T1
UMTS
UTRP4 UIEC Ports for eightchannels of IP overE1/T1
UMTS
UTRPb4 No sub-board Ports for eightchannels of TDMover E1/T1
GSM and LTE
UTRP6 UUAS Port for oneunchannelizedSTM-1/OC-3
UMTS
UTRP9 UQEC Four universal FE/GE electrical ports
UMTS
PanelsFigure 5-29 shows the panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.
Figure 5-29 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports
Figure 5-30 shows the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.
Figure 5-30 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1sRUNALMACT
E1/T1(0-3)
UTRP
E1/T1(4-7)
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
Figure 5-31 shows the panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.
Figure 5-31 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1
Figure 5-32 shows the panel of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.
Figure 5-32 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports
Functions
The UTRP has the following functions:
l The UTRP2 provides two 100M/1000M Ethernet optical ports, performs functions of theMAC layer, receives and transmits data on Ethernet links, and analyzes the MAC address.
l The UTRP3 provides eight E1s/T1s and performs inverse multiplexing and demultiplexingon a single ATM cell flow on the eight E1/T1 links.
l The UTRP4 provides eight E1s/T1s, frames and deframes HDLC frames, and allocates andcontrols the 256 HDLC timeslot channels.
l The UTRP4 provides an E1/T1 port for four TDM transmission links in GSM mode andprovides a port for four transmission links in another mode for co-transmission in a dual-mode base station.
l The UTRP6 supports one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port.l The UTRP9 provides four 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet electrical ports and performs the
functions of the MAC layer and physical layer.l The cold backup is supported.
LEDs
Table 5-38 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UTRP.
Table 5-38 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green ON The board has powerinput, but the board isfaulty.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
Label Color Status Description
OFF The board has nopower input, or theboard is faulty.
ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board is runningproperly.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
The board is notconfigured or isloading software.
ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s
The board is in theoffline state or undertest.
ALM Red ON or blinkingrapidly
The board isreporting alarms.
OFF The board is runningproperly.
ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s
The board isreporting a minoralarm.
ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board isreporting a majoralarm.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
The board isreporting a criticalalarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is instandby mode.
The ACT indicator on the UTRPb4 board in GSM mode has different status as the ACT indicatoron other boards, as shown in Table 5-39.
Table 5-39 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRPb4 board in GSM mode
Status of the ACTIndicator
Before ConfigurationsTake Effect
After ConfigurationsTake Effect
Steady on The board works in activemode, and none of the E1ports in GSM mode isfunctional
The board works in activemode
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
Status of the ACTIndicator
Before ConfigurationsTake Effect
After ConfigurationsTake Effect
Steady off The board works in standbymode
The board works in standbymode
On for 0.125s and off for0.125s
The board serves as an activeboard, and some or all E1ports in GSM mode arefunctional
-
UTRP2 and UTRP9 provide two LEDs for indicating the status of the current link. Table5-40 describes the LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9.
Table 5-40 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9
Label Color Status Description
LINK Green ON The link is properlyconnected.
OFF The link isdisconnected.
ACT Orange Blinking The link is receivingor transmitting data.
OFF The link is notreceiving ortransmitting data.
PortsTable 5-41 describes the ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.
Table 5-41 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP connector
Table 5-42 describes the ports on the UTRP3 and UTRP4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.
Table 5-42 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 connector
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
Table 5-43 describes the port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.
Table 5-43 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 port 1 SFP connector
Table 5-44 describes the ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.
Table 5-44 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ-45 connector
DIP SwitchesThere is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
The UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4 has three DIP switches numbered from SW1 to SW3. SW1and SW2 are used to set the grounding status of the eight E1s. SW3 is used to set matchedimpedance for the eight E1s. Figure 5-33 shows the DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4,Figure 5-34 shows the DIP switch on the UTRPb4.
Figure 5-33 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
Figure 5-34 DIP switch on the UTRPb4
Table 5-45, Table 5-46, and Table 5-47 describe how to set the DIP switches on the UTRP.
Table 5-45 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode
ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
Table 5-46 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode
ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
CAUTIONSW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to E1s No.4 to No.7 and SW2corresponds to E1s No.0 to No.3.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
Table 5-47 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1 Mode
ON ON OFF OFF The E1impedance isset to 120ohms.
ON ON ON ON The E1impedance isset to 75ohms.
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
5.2.11 USCUThis section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).
PanelThere are two types of USCU: USCUb0, USCUb1 and USCUb2, as shown in Figure 5-35 andFigure 5-36.
Figure 5-35 Panel of the USCUb0/USCUb1 (0.5 U)
Figure 5-36 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)
(1) GPS port (2) RGPS port (3) TOD port (4) M-1PPS port (5) BITS port
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
FunctionsThe USCU has the following functions:
l The USCU provides interface for an external RGPS device (such as a reused device of theoperator), Metro1000 device, BITS device, and TOD input.
l The USCUb0 does not incorporate the satellite card.l The USCUb1 has the GPS receiver. It is used for clock synchronization or obtaining
accurate clock signals from transmission devices.l A dual-satellite receiver is configured in a USCUb2, which supports GPS, GLONASS, or
COMPASS clock signals.
LEDTable 5-48 and Table 5-49 describe the LEDs on the USCU.
Table 5-48 LEDs on the USCU
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green On There is power supply, and theboard is faulty.
Off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)
The board is running properly.
Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
Software is being loaded to theboard, or the board is notconfigured.
ALM Red Off The board is running properly,and no alarm is generated.
On An alarm is generated, and theboard needs to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)
An alarm is generated. Thealarm may be caused due tofaults in the related boards orports. Therefore, whether theboard needs to be replacedcannot be determined.
ACT Green On The serial port forcommunication between theUSCU and the main controlboard is enabled.
Off The serial port forcommunication between theUSCU and the main controlboard is disabled.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
Table 5-49 LEDs on the TOD port
Color Meaning Default Configuration
Green On: The TOD port isconfigured as the inputport.
The green LED of the TOD0 port is off,and the yellow LED of the TOD0 port ison.
Yellow On: The TOD port isconfigured as the outputport.
The yellow LED of the TOD1 port is off,and the green LED of the TOD1 port is on.
Ports
Table 5-50 describes the ports on the USCU.
Table 5-50 Ports on the USCU
Port Connector Description
GPS port SMA coaxialconnector
Receives GPS signals
RGPS port PCB weldedwiring terminal
Receives RGPS signals
TOD0 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals
TOD1 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, andreceives TOD signals from the M1000
BITS port SMA coaxialconnector
Receives BITS clock signals, and supports adaptiveinput of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock referencesource
M-1PPS port SMA coaxialconnector
Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000
5.2.12 UBRIThe Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical orelectrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on theCPRI.
Panel
Figure 5-37 shows the panel of the UBRI.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Figure 5-37 Panel of the UBRI
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
l Provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports
l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI
LEDs
Table 5-51 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.
Table 5-51 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI
LED Color State Description
RUN Green ON steady There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF steady There is no powersupply, or the boardis in the alarm status.
1s ON, 1s OFF The board worksproperly.
0.125s ON, 0.125sOFF
The board is loadingsoftware.
ALM Red ON or blinking at ahigh frequency
The board is in thealarm status.
OFF steady No alarm isgenerated.
ACT Green ON steady The board worksproperly.
OFF steady The board is notworking.
The UBRI provides six LEDs indicating the status of the CRRI links, which are above the SFPports. Table 5-52 describes the CPRI link status LED.
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Table 5-52 CPRI link status LED
Label Color State Description
CPRIx Red/Green ON (green) The CPRI link isavailable.
ON (red) The optical modulefails to receivesignals.
0.125s ON, 0.125sOFF (Red)
The RRU on the CPRIlink is faulty.
1s ON, 1s OFF (red) The CPRI link is outof lock.
PortsTable 5-53 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI.
Table 5-53 Ports on the panel of the UBRI
Label Connector Port Quantity Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP 6 Connecting the BBUand the RF module
BBU3900Hardware Description 5 BBU3900 Equipment
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
About This Chapter
The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of theDBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configuredin the DBS3900.
6.1 Power Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
6.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThe transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900and outdoor DBS3900.
6.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of theDBS3900.
6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
6.1 Power Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), whichconverts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into –48 V DC power to provides power to customerequipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advancedpower module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
NOTEThe DBS3900 is configured with the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
When the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is configured withone APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). TheAPM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into –48 VDC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC. Figure 6-1 describes power cableconnections.
Figure 6-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30,one TMC, and one BBC
Table 6-1 lists the power cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
Table 6-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30, oneTMC, and one BBC
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet
P2 and P5 Power cable for the fan box
P3 7.3 BBU Power Cable
P4 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet
P6 and P8 Input Power Cable of the Heating Film
P7 Input Power Cable of the Heater
When a base station is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and oneBBC, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V ACpower into –48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC11H (Ver.A).Figure 6-2 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 6-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
Table 6-2 lists the power cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Table 6-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30H PowerCabinet
P2 and P5 Power cable for the fan box
P3 BBU power cable
P4 Input Power Cable of the TMC11H
P6 and P8 Input power cables for the heating film in thebattery cabinet
P7 Input power cable for the heater in the batterycabinet
When a base station is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and oneIBBS200T, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220V AC power into –48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver.A).Figure 6-3 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 6-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
Table 6-3 lists the power cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
Table 6-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P2 and P5 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P6 and P7 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Power Cable Connections in the –48 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the input power is –48 V DC, a distributed base station is configured with two TMCs.The TMCs are configured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), whichprovide power to the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 6-4 describes powercable connections.
Figure 6-4 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs
Table 6-4 lists the power cables.
Table 6-4 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet
P2 Power cable for the fan box
P3 BBU power cable
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) providepower to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 6-5 shows the power cableconnections.
Figure 6-5 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Table 6-5 lists the power cables.
Table 6-5 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet
P2 Power cable for the fan box
P3 BBU power cable
6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C)
To meet the requirements of 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or –48 V DC power input, Huawei providesa series of power equipment in the APM30H (Ver.B) and the APM30H (Ver.C). APM30H isshort for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. The power equipment converts110 V AC or 220 V AC power to –48 V DC power and provides power to optional equipment.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioIn a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and oneIBBS200D are configured. The APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the embedded powersystem (EPS), which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power to –48 V DC power and suppliespower to the baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and TMC11H (Ver.B). TMC11His short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. IBBS200D is short for integratedbattery backup system with direct cooler. Figure 6-6 shows the power cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
Figure 6-6 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), oneTMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-6 lists the power cables.
Table 6-6 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H(Ver.B), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P7 RRU Power Cable
P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P9 Power cable for the heating film
In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and oneIBBS200D are configured. The EPS in the APM30H (Ver.C) converts 110 V AC or 220 V ACpower to –48 V DC power and supplies power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure6-7 shows the power cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
Figure 6-7 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), oneTMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-7 lists the power cables.
Table 6-7 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H(Ver.C), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P5 External AC Input Power Cable
P6 RRU power cable
P7 BBU Power Cable
P8 and P9 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
Figure 6-8 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one integrated battery backup system with TEC(IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
Figure 6-8 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), oneTMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-8 lists the power cables.
Table 6-8 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H(Ver.B), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 and P9 Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 and P5 Power Cables for the TEC Cooler
P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P7 RRU Power Cable
P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
Figure 6-9 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
Figure 6-9 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), oneTMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-9 lists the power cables.
Table 6-9 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H(Ver.C), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P4 External AC Input Power Cable
P5 RRU power cable
P6 BBU Power Cable
P7 and P8 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P9 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
Figure 6-10 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Figure 6-10 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-10 lists the power cables.
Table 6-10 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H(Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box
P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P8 RRU Power Cable
P9 Power cable for the heating film
P11 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P13 and P14 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Figure 6-11 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
Figure 6-11 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-11 lists the power cables.
Table 6-11 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H(Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P5 External AC Input Power Cable
P6 RRU power cable
P7 BBU Power Cable
P8 and P9 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
P12 and P13 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
Figure 6-12 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts.
Figure 6-12 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-12 lists the power cables.
Table 6-12 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H(Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 and P9 Power cable for the junction box
P2, P6, and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 and P5 Power Cables for the TEC Cooler
P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P8 RRU Power Cable
P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P12 and P13 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
Figure 6-13 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts.
Figure 6-13 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-13 lists the power cables.
Table 6-13 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H(Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P2 Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P4 External AC Input Power Cable
P5 RRU power cable
P6 BBU Power Cable
P7 and P8 Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P9 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
SN Description
P11 and P12 Power Cables for Storage Batteries
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are required. The power cable connections for the cabinetshousing BBU0 and BBU1 are the same. Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 show the power cableconnections in a triple-mode scenario when the BBU is configured in the APM30H (Ver.B).
Figure 6-14 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
Table 6-14 lists the power cables.
Table 6-14 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H(Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P7 RRU Power Cable
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
SN Description
P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P9 Power cable for the heating film
Figure 6-15 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
P8P8
P9P9P9P9P10P10
P12P12
P13P13P14P14
P11P11
P7P7
P6P6
P4P4P5P5
P1P1
P2P2
P3P3
P8P8
P9P9
P10P10
P13P13P14P14
P7P7
P6P6
P4P4P5P5
P1P1
P2P2
P3P3BBU0 BBU1
Table 6-15 lists the power cables.
Table 6-15 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H(Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box
P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3 BBU power cable
P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P8 RRU Power Cable
P9 Power cable for the heating film
P11 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P13 and P14 Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Power Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioIn a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured. The DCDU-03Bsupplies power to the BBU, RRU, and other components. Figure 6-16 shows the power cableconnections.
Figure 6-16 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
Table 6-16 lists the power cables.
Table 6-16 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
P3 BBU power cable
In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured. The DCDU-11Bsupplies power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission devices. Figure 6-17 shows the power cableconnections.
Figure 6-17 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Table 6-17 lists the power cables.
Table 6-17 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
P3 BBU power cable
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are required. The power cable connections for the cabinetshousing BBU0 and BBU1 are the same. Figure 6-18 shows the power cable connections in atriple-mode scenario, taking the TMC11H (Ver.B) as an example.
Figure 6-18 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
Table 6-18 lists the power cables.
Table 6-18 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
P3 BBU power cable
Power Cable Connections in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario
in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) is configured. Thepower system (DC/DC) converts the +24 V DC power to –48 V DC power and supplies thepower to the DCDU-03B, which supplies power to the BBU, RRUs, and other devices in thecabinet. Figure 6-19 shows the power cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
Figure 6-19 Power cable connections for one APM30H (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
Table 6-19 lists the power cables.
Table 6-19 Power cables for one +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
P1 Input power cable for the power system (DC/DC)
P2 Input power cable for the DCDU-03B
P3 BBU power cable
In a triple-mode scenario, two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) are configured. Figure 6-20 showsthe power cable connections.
Figure 6-20 Power cable connections for two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-modescenario
Table 6-20 lists the power cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
Table 6-20 Power cables for two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description
P1 Input power cable for the power system (DC/DC)
P2 Input power cable for the DCDU-03B
P3 BBU power cable
6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06To meet the requirements of 110 V AC, 220 V AC, –48 V DC, or +24 V DC power input, theoutdoor mini box (OMB) and the indoor mini box (IMB03) are configured with a power system(AC/DC or DC/DC) to convert 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or +24 V DC power to –48 V DC powerand then supply power to customer equipment.
NOTE
l For power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an IMB03 or with an IMB03 and an indoorfloor installation support (IFS06) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, +24 V DC, or –48 V DC power supplyscenarios, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
l If a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or an IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a single-mode or dual-mode base station. If a DBS3900 is configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06, theDBS3900 can be configured as a triple-mode base station.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
Figure 6-21 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario.
Figure 6-21 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or220 V AC power supply scenario
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
Table 6-21 lists the power cables.
Table 6-21 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V ACpower supply scenario
SN Description
P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan
P2 Power cable for the heat exchange unit typeA (HEUA)
P3 Baseband unit (BBU) power cable
P4 Input power cable for the DC powerdistribution box
P5 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan
P6 Input power cable for the power system (AC/DC)
P7 AC input power cable for the OMB
Power Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 6-22 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in DCpower supply scenario.
Figure 6-22 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in DC powersupply scenario
Table 6-22 lists the power cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Table 6-22 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V ACpower supply scenario
SN Description
P1 Power cable for the inner air circulation fan
P2 Power cable for the HEUA
P3 Power cable for the outer air circulation fan
P4 BBU power cable
P5 DC input power cable for the OMB
6.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThe transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900and outdoor DBS3900.
6.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM OnlyBase Station
In a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable canbe used for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 CableFigure 6-23 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmissionboard in the BBU3900.
Figure 6-23 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-23 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-23 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
Figure 6-24 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured astransmission boards in the BBU3900.
Figure 6-24 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-24 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-24 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE Cable
Figure 6-25 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when theFE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.
Figure 6-25 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 6-25 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-25 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
Figure 6-26 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when theFE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission.
Figure 6-26 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 6-26 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-26 FE/GE optical cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM OnlyBase Station
In a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 Cable
Figure 6-27 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmissionboard in the BBU3900.
Figure 6-27 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-27 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-27 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Figure 6-28 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured astransmission boards in the BBU3900.
Figure 6-28 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-28 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-28 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Transmission over the FE CableFigure 6-29 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is usedfor data transmission.
Figure 6-29 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 6-29 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-29 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-30 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cable is used fordata transmission.
Figure 6-30 FE/GE optical cable connections
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Table 6-30 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-30 FE/GE optical cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS OnlyBase Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 CableFigure 6-31 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 6-31 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Table 6-31 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-31 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-32 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where the WMPT and UTRP3 (or UTRP4) are configured asthe main control board in the BBU.
Figure 6-32 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
Table 6-32 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-32 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE CableFigure 6-33 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 6-33 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Table 6-33 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-33 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-34 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP9 are configured inthe BBU.
Figure 6-34 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
Table 6-34 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-34 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-35 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 6-35 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
Table 6-35 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-35 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-36 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP2 are configured inthe BBU.
Figure 6-36 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Table 6-36 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-36 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS OnlyBase Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 Cable
Figure 6-37 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 6-37 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Table 6-37 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-37 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-38 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP3/UTRP4 is configured inthe BBU.
Figure 6-38 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Table 6-38 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-38 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
Transmission over the FE CableFigure 6-39 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 6-39 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Table 6-39 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-39 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-40 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP9 is configured inthe BBU.
Figure 6-40 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Table 6-40 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-40 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-41 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 6-41 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
Table 6-41 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-41 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-42 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP2 is configured inthe BBU.
Figure 6-42 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Table 6-42 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-42 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE OnlyBase Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.
Transmission over the E1/T1 CableWhen the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 6-43 showsthe transmission cable connections.
Figure 6-43 E1/T1 cable connections
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Table 6-43 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-43 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE/GE CableWhen an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usuallyused for data transmission. Figure 6-44 shows the transmission cable connections.
Figure 6-44 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 6-44 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-44 FE/GE optical cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-45 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when theFE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.
Figure 6-45 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 6-45 describes the cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
Table 6-45 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only BaseStation
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.
Transmission over the E1/T1 CableWhen the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 6-46 showsthe transmission cable connections.
Figure 6-46 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-46 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-46 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE/GE CableWhen an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usuallyused for data transmission. Figure 6-47 shows the transmission cable connections.
Figure 6-47 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 6-47 describes the cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
Table 6-47 FE/GE optical cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-48 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when theFE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.
Figure 6-48 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 6-48 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-48 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
6.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base stationcan implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used.Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports ofthe other type are connected to the transport network.
TDM Common TransmissionFigure 6-49 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMcommon transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port toconnect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplaneto implement TDM common transmission.
Figure 6-49 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM commontransmission mode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Table 6-49 describes the cables.
Table 6-49 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmissionmode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-50 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMcommon transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared portto connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using thebackplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE
Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently,but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.
Figure 6-50 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM commontransmission mode (2)
Table 6-50 describes the cables.
Table 6-50 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmissionmode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
IP Over E1 Common Transmission
Figure 6-51 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IPcommon transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared portto connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPTare interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
NOTE
IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMUand the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-51, which are not described here.
Figure 6-51 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-51 describes the cables.
Table 6-51 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-52 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission,and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implementIP co-transmission.
NOTE
IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMUand the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-52, which are not described here.
Figure 6-52 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-52 describes the cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
Table 6-52 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
IP Over FE Common TransmissionFigure 6-53 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared portsfor data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 areinterconnected to implement IP co-transmission.
Figure 6-53 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (1)
Table 6-53 describes the cables.
Table 6-53 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-54 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnectedto implement IP co-transmission.
Figure 6-54 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (2)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
Table 6-54 describes the cables.
Table 6-54 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-55 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IPcommon transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the sharedport to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPTare interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
Figure 6-55 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (3)
Table 6-55 describes the cables.
Table 6-55 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (3)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has thefollowing characteristics:l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNC
respectively using the active channel.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels.l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is
restored, the route is switched back to the active one.l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the
GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Qualityof Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has thefollowing limitations:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.l The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS
transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSCand the RNC.
Figure 6-56 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC andRNC.
Figure 6-56 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 6-56 describes the cables.
Table 6-56 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the base station controller
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 6-57 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU andWMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSCand RNC.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
Figure 6-57 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 6-57 describes the cables.
Table 6-57 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the base station controller
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
6.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base stationcan implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used.Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports ofthe other type are connected to the transport network.
TDM Common TransmissionFigure 6-58 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMcommon transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port toconnect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplaneto implement TDM common transmission.
Figure 6-58 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM commontransmission mode (1)
Table 6-58 describes the cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
Table 6-58 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmissionmode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-59 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMcommon transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared portto connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using thebackplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE
Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently,but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.
Figure 6-59 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM commontransmission mode (2)
Table 6-59 describes the cable.
Table 6-59 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmissionmode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
IP Over E1 Common TransmissionFigure 6-60 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IPcommon transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared portto connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPTare interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
NOTE
IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMUand the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-60, which are not described here.
Figure 6-60 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
Table 6-60 describes the cables.
Table 6-60 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 6-61 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IPcommon transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the sharedport to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPTare interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
Figure 6-61 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-61 describes the cables.
Table 6-61 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
IP Over FE Common TransmissionFigure 6-62 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared portsfor data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 areinterconnected to implement IP co-transmission.
Figure 6-62 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
Table 6-62 describes the cables.
Table 6-62 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-63 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnectedto implement IP co-transmission.
Figure 6-63 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (2)
Table 6-63 describes the cables.
Table 6-63 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has thefollowing characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNCrespectively using the active channel.
l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels.
l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel isrestored, the route is switched back to the active one.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of theGSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Qualityof Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has thefollowing limitations:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.l The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS
transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSCand the RNC.
Figure 6-64 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC andRNC.
Figure 6-64 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the BSC and RNC
Table 6-64 describes the cables.
Table 6-64 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the BSC and RNC
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 6-65 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU andWMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSCand RNC.
Figure 6-65 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the BSC and RNC
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
Table 6-65 describes the cables.
Table 6-65 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the BSC and RNC
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1
Figure 6-66 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for datatransmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works inseparate transmission mode.
Figure 6-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1mode
Table 6-66 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE
Figure 6-67 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.
Figure 6-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-67 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-68 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.
Figure 6-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-68 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1Figure 6-69 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for datatransmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works inseparate transmission mode.
Figure 6-69 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode
Table 6-69 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-69 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEFigure 6-70 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.
Figure 6-70 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)
Table 6-70 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-70 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
Figure 6-71 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.
Figure 6-71 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)
Table 6-71 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-71 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based onthe interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPTpanels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE portson the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type areused for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transportnetwork.
IP over E1 Common Transmission
Figure 6-72 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-72 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
Table 6-72 describes the cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
Table 6-72 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 6-73 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-73 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
Table 6-73 describes the cables.
Table 6-73 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
IP over FE/GE Common TransmissionFigure 6-74 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
Figure 6-74 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (1)
Table 6-74 describes the cables.
Table 6-74 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-75 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-75 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (2)
Table 6-75 describes the cables.
Table 6-75 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Route Backup Mode with IP Common TransmissionIn a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the transmission
equipment respectively using the active channel.l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is
restored, the route is switched back to the active one.l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the
GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Qualityof Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to thetransmission equipment.
Figure 6-76 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU andLMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to thetransmission equipment.
Figure 6-76 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transmission equipment
Table 6-76 describes the cables.
Table 6-76 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transmission equipment
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 6-77 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmissionequipment.
Figure 6-77 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transmission equipment
Table 6-77 describes the cables.
Table 6-77 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transmission equipment
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based onthe interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPTpanels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE portson the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type areused for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transportnetwork.
IP Over E1 Common TransmissionFigure 6-78 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-78 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Table 6-78 describes the cables.
Table 6-78 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 6-79 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-79 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
Table 6-79 describes the cables.
Table 6-79 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
IP Over FE/GE Common TransmissionFigure 6-80 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-80 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
Table 6-80 describes the cables.
Table 6-80 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-81 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.
Figure 6-81 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode
Table 6-81 describes the cables.
Table 6-81 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport networkthrough the primary channel.
l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of theGSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT
panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.
Figure 6-82 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU andLMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the basestation controller.
Figure 6-82 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 6-82 describes the cables.
Table 6-82 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the base station controller
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the BSCand RNC
Figure 6-83 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the base stationcontroller.
Figure 6-83 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the base station controller
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
Table 6-83 describes the cables.
Table 6-83 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the base station controller
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
Figure 6-84 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-84 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-84 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-84 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
Cable Number Cable Description
T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-85 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-85 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-85 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-85 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-86 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port isused for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-86 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-86 describes the cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Table 6-86 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T6 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-87 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is usedfor data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-87 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-87 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-87 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
Figure 6-88 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both theGSM and LTE sides.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Figure 6-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Table 6-88 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-89 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical portis used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Table 6-89 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GEFigure 6-90 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-90 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-91 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-91 describes the cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
Table 6-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-92 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port isused for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-92 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-93 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is usedfor data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
Table 6-93 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
Figure 6-94 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both theGSM and LTE sides.
Figure 6-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Table 6-94 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-95 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical portis used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Table 6-95 describes the cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
Table 6-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T2 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.15 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, routebackup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.
IP Over E1 Common Transmission
Figure 6-96 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-96 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-96 describes the cables.
Table 6-96 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
Figure 6-97 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-97 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-97 describes the cables.
Table 6-97 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
IP Over FE/GE Common TransmissionFigure 6-98 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-98 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (1)
Table 6-98 describes the cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
Table 6-98 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-99 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-99 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (2)
Table 6-99 describes the cables.
Table 6-99 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPTand LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electricalports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the transmissionequipment respectively using the active channel.
l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel isrestored, the route is switched back to the active one.
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of theUMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to thetransmission equipment.
Figure 6-100 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT andLMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to thetransmission equipment.
Figure 6-100 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backupmode with IP common transmission (1)
Table 6-100 describes the cables.
Table 6-100 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IPcommon transmission (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 6-101 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmissionequipment.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
Figure 6-101 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backupmode with IP common transmission (2)
Table 6-101 describes the cables.
Table 6-101 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IPcommon transmission (2)
SN Description
T1 and T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 and T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Hybrid Transmission
In hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared portsto connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services withhigh QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the serviceswith low QoS requirements, such as PS services.
The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTEbase station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GEport are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.
Figure 6-102 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTSE1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).
Figure 6-102 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)
Table 6-102 describes the cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
Table 6-102 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T4 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-103 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTSE1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).
Figure 6-103 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)
Table 6-103 describes the cables.
Table 6-103 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.9 FE Surge ProtectionTransfer Cable.
T4 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T5 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
6.2.16 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, routebackup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.
IP Over E1 Common TransmissionFigure 6-104 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-104 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-104 describes the cables.
Table 6-104 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 6-105 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-105 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-105 describes the cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Table 6-105 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
IP Over FE/GE Common Transmission
Figure 6-106 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-106 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (1)
Table 6-106 describes the cables.
Table 6-106 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-107 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.
Figure 6-107 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode
Table 6-107 describes the cables.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
Table 6-107 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common TransmissionIn route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPTand LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electricalports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport network
through the primary channel.l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel
is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the
UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT
panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.
Figure 6-108 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT andLMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to thetransmission equipment.
Figure 6-108 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backupmode with IP common transmission (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
Table 6-108 describes the cables.
Table 6-108 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IPcommon transmission (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 6-109 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmissionequipment.
Figure 6-109 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backupmode with IP common transmission (2)
Table 6-109 describes the cables.
Table 6-109 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IPcommon transmission (2)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Hybrid TransmissionIn hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared portsto connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services withhigh QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the serviceswith low QoS requirements, such as PS services.
The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTEbase station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GEport are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
Figure 6-110 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTSE1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).
Figure 6-110 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)
Table 6-110 describes the cables.
Table 6-110 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 6-111 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTSE1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).
Figure 6-111 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)
Table 6-111 describes the cables.
Table 6-111 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
6.2.17 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GEFigure 6-112 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on theUMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-112 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-112 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-112 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-113 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on theUMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-113 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
Table 6-113 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-113 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-114 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmissionon the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-114 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-114 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-114 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T6 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-115 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmissionon the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
Figure 6-115 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-115 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-115 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T5 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEFigure 6-116 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station inseparate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both theUMTS and LTE sides.
Figure 6-116 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 6-116 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-116 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T3 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 and T4 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
Figure 6-117 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE opticalport is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-117 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-117 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-117 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.9 FE Surge Protection TransferCable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.18 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
Figure 6-118 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on theUMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-118 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
Table 6-118 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-118 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-119 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on theUMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-119 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-119 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-119 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-120 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmissionon the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-120 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
Table 6-120 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-120 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-121 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmissionon the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-121 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-121 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-121 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
Figure 6-122 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station inseparate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both theUMTS and LTE sides.
Figure 6-122 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
Table 6-122 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-122 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-123 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station whenthe FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE opticalport is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-123 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 6-123 describes the cable connections.
Table 6-123 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T2 See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode BaseStation
The triple-mode base station solution is provided by Huawei in SingleRAN6.0, which isapplicable to three scenarios: GU+LO, GL+UO, and UO+GL. This section describes thetransmission cable connections for the triple-mode base stations in three scenarios.
In SingleRAN6.0, a single BBU can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs arerequired for a triple-mode base station.
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, whilethe UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
GU (BBU0)+LO (BBU1)In the GU+LO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. The common transmission mode,separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission aresupported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.7 Transmission CableConnections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.8Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connectionsin the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU1 works in LTE Only mode. For details about the transmissioncable connections, see 6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only BaseStation and 6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station.
GL (BBU0)+UO (BBU1)In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. The common transmission mode,separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission aresupported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.11 Transmission CableConnections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.12Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connectionsin the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS Only mode. For details about the transmissioncable connections, see 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS OnlyBase Station and 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only BaseStation.
UO (BBU0)+GL (BBU1)In the UO+GL scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS Only mode. For details about the transmissioncable connections, see 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS OnlyBase Station and 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only BaseStation.
In the UO+GL scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. The common transmission mode,separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission aresupported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.11 Transmission CableConnections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.12Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connectionsin the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
6.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of theDBS3900.
6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connectionscan be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 6-124 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb,the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, and theMIMO is supported.
Figure 6-124 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 6-125 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb,the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMOis supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sectorare cascaded.
Figure 6-125 CPRI cable connections (2)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
Figure 6-126 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPd,the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMOis supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sectorare cascaded.
Figure 6-126 CPRI cable connections (3)
6.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections canbe used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, six RRUs correspond to three sectors.In this case, a pair of two RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded.Figure 6-127 shows the CPRI cable connections.
Figure 6-127 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, nine RRUs correspond to threesectors. In this case, a group of three RRUs working in the same sector with different bands iscascaded. Figure 6-128 shows the CPRI cable connections.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
Figure 6-128 CPRI cable connections (2)
6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cableconnections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 6-129 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band modeand three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors.
Figure 6-129 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, an RRU3804 working in star topologycorresponds to a sector, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, twoRRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair oftwo RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, theCPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-130.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
Figure 6-130 CPRI cable connections (2)
When the RRU3804 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and apair of two RRU3804s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, or when theRRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star andchain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in thesame sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure6-131.
Figure 6-131 CPRI cable connections (3)
When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topologycorrespond to three sectors, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in single-band mode, andthree RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star topology correspond to three sectors, the CPRIcable connections are shown in Figure 6-132.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
Figure 6-132 CPRI cable connections (4)
6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.
NOTEThe CPRI ports on the LBBP are connected to the RRUs from CPRI0 in sequence, and none of the portsis skipped.
When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHzor 20 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown inFigure 6-133.
Figure 6-133 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 6-134 shows the CPRI cable connections of the two combined RRUs serving not morethan three cells. The RRUs work in single-band 4T4R MIMO mode, providing 10 MHzbandwidth.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
Figure 6-134 CPRI cable connections (2)
Figure 6-135 shows the CPRI cable connections of the two combined RRUs serving not morethan three cells. The RRUs work in single-band 4T4R MIMO mode, providing 20 MHzbandwidth. .
Figure 6-135 CPRI cable connections (3)
6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, twoRRU3008s working in CPRI star topology correspond to one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008sworking in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRIcable connections are shown in Figure 6-136.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
Figure 6-136 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, anda pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected incascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-137.
Figure 6-137 CPRI cable connections (2)
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth,supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs in a sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, anda pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected incascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-138.
Figure 6-138 CPRI cable connections (3)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and theRRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works insingle-band mode, three RRU3008s working in star topology serve three sectors. The CPRI cableconnections are shown in Figure 6-139.
Figure 6-139 CPRI cable connections (4)
6.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it workingin CPRI star topology serves three sectors and does not support MIMO. The CPRI cableconnections are shown in Figure 6-140.
Figure 6-140 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804works in single-band mode, a pair of RRUs working in the same sector are connected in
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
cascading mode, and the star topology is used. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure6-141.
Figure 6-141 CPRI cable connections (2)
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth,supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology.When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in star topology corresponds to threesectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector are connected in cascading mode. The CPRIcable connections are shown in Figure 6-142.
Figure 6-142 CPRI cable connections (3)
6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base StationThe triple-mode base station solution is provided by Huawei in SingleRAN6.0, which isapplicable to three scenarios: GU+LO, GL+UO, and UO+GL. This section describes the CPRIcable connections for the triple-mode base stations in three scenarios.
In SingleRAN6.0, a single BBU can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs arerequired for a triple-mode base station.
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
l The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, whilethe UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
GU (BBU0)+LO (BBU1)In the GU+LO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. 6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connectionsin the GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU1 works in LTE Only mode. 6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection inthe LO Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
GL (BBU0)+UO (BBU1)In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections inthe GL Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS Only mode. 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection inthe UMTS Only Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
UO (BBU0)+GL (BBU1)In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS Only mode. 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection inthe UMTS Only Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections inthe GL Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 orAPM30H (Ver.A)
The monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 are different in 110 V AC, 220 V AC,and –48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power SupplyScenario
NOTEIf a DBS3900 is configured with an advanced power module (APM30) or APM30H (Ver.A), the DBS3900can work only in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario. APM30H is short for advanced power module witha heat-exchanger cooler.
Figure 6-143 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one backup battery cabinet (BBC) in a 110V or 220 V AC power supply scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
Figure 6-143 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30,one TMC, and one BBC
Table 6-124 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-124 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30, one TMC,and one BBC
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theAPMI and the BBU
S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
S5 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries
S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30Transmission Cabinet
Figure 6-144 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC. TMC11H is short for transmissioncabinet with heat-exchanger cooler.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
Figure 6-144 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
Table 6-125 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-125 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A),one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
SN Description
S1 Environment monitoring signal cable
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU
S4 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries
S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
Figure 6-145 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one integrated battery backup system withTEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
Figure 6-145 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
Table 6-126 shows the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-126 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A),one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
SN Description
S1 Environment monitoring signal cable
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU
S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable
S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
Figure 6-146 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
Figure 6-146 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoAPM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs
Table 6-127 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-127 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A),one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs
SN Description
S1 Environment monitoring signal cable
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU
S4 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries
S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
Figure 6-147 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
Figure 6-147 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoAPM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts
Table 6-128 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-128 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A),one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts
SN Description
S1 Environment monitoring signal cable
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3 and S7 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU
S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable
S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 6-148 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo TMCs in a –48 V DC power supply scenario.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
Figure 6-148 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs
Table 6-129 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-129 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs
SN Description
S1 and S2 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theAPMI and the BBU
Figure 6-149 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo TMC11Hs (Ver.A).
Figure 6-149 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Table 6-130 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-130 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
SN Description
S1 and S2 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B)or APM30H (Ver.C)
The monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 are different in 110 V AC, 220 V AC,and –48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power SupplyScenario
Figure 6-150 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-modeor dual-mode scenario.
Figure 6-150 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-131 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-131 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
SN Description
S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU
Figure 6-151 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Figure 6-151 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-132 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-132 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUEand the BBU
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
Figure 6-152 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Figure 6-152 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-133 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-133 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU
S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs
Figure 6-153 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withone APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
Figure 6-153 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H(Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-134 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-134 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C),one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUEand the BBU
S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs
Figure 6-154 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
Figure 6-154 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoAPM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
S2S2 S3S3S1S1
S1S1
S5S5
S4S4S6S6
S2S2 S6S6S1S1
S1S1
S4S4S6S6
Table 6-135 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-135 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU
S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs
Figure 6-155 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
Figure 6-155 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoAPM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-136 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-136 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.C),one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUEand the BBU
S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU0 is configured in the basic cabinetand BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. All the monitoring equipment is connected toBBU0 instead of BBU1. The monitoring schemes are the same as in a dual-mode scenario.Figure 6-156 shows the monitoring scheme in a triple-mode scenario taking the APM30H(Ver.B) as an example.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
Figure 6-156 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoAPM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a triple-modescenario
Table 6-137 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-137 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B),one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description
S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU
S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 6-157 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Figure 6-157 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver.B)
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
Table 6-138 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-138 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
S1 and S2 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU
Figure 6-158 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured withtwo TMC11Hs (Ver.C).
Figure 6-158 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-modeor dual-mode scenario
Table 6-139 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-139 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-modescenario
SN Description
S1 and S2 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUEand the BBU
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU0 is configured in the basic TMC andBBU1 is configured in the extension TMC. All the monitoring equipment is connected to BBU0instead of BBU1. The monitoring schemes are the same as in a dual-mode scenario. Figure6-159 shows the monitoring scheme in a triple-mode scenario taking the TMC11H (Ver.B) asan example.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
Figure 6-159 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-modescenario
Table 6-140 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-140 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
SN Description
S1 and S2 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU
6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 VAC/220 V AC, –48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.
NOTE
l The monitoring signal cable connections for the IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 that is configured for theDBS3900 are described in the DBS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) InstallationGuide. IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor installation support.
l In the single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with the outdoor mini box(OMB) or IMB03. The DBS3900 is configured with the IMB03+IFS06 in the single-mode, dual-modescenario, or triple-mode scenario.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power SupplyScenario
Figure 6-160 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith an AC OMB.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
Figure 6-160 Connections of the monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB
S1S1
S1
S2S2
S2S2
S2S2
S2S2
S3S3
S3S3
S5S5S5
S4S4
S4S4
Table 6-141 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-141 Monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB
SN Description
S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan
S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC SurgeProtection Box
S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DCPower Equipment
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the –48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 6-161 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith a DC OMB.
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
Figure 6-161 Connections of the DC OMB monitoring signal cables
Table 6-142 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Table 6-142 Monitoring signal cables for the DC OMB
SN Description
S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor
S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan
S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
BBU3900Hardware Description 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
7 BBU3900 Cables
About This Chapter
This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, andinstallation positions.
7.1 List of BBU3900 CablesThis chapter describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBUpower cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surgeprotection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnectioncable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMIand the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable forthe EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC), BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable.
7.2 PGND CableThe PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.
7.3 BBU Power CableThis section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cablecan be used, depending on the power supply scenario.
7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA.The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.
7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C)A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.
7.6 E1/T1 CableThe E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits basebandsignals.
7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer CableThis section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to thetransmission board. This cable is optional.
7.8 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices andtransmits baseband signals.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer CableThe FE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control boardto the UFLP.
7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical PortsThe cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical PortsThe cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
7.12 FE/GE Optical CableThe FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and thetransmission device. This cable is optional.
7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic CableCPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiberoptic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBUThis describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits theenvironment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBUThe monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoringinformation collected by the HEUA to the BBU.
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBUThe monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBUand transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal CableThis section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals fromthe EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerfault alarms on the PSU.
7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.
7.20 BBU Alarm CableThe BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.
7.21 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPSantenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
7.1 List of BBU3900 CablesThis chapter describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBUpower cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surgeprotection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnectioncable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMIand the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable forthe EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC), BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable.
Table 7-1 describes the List of BBU3900 Cables.
Table 7-1 List of BBU3900 Cables
Cable One End The Other End
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
7.2 PGNDCable
OT terminal(6mm2, M4)
BBU/Grounding bolt
OT terminal(6mm2, M8)
Nearestgrounding bar
7.3 BBUPowerCable
3V3 connector BBU/UPEU/PWR
OT terminal(6mm2, M4)
DCDU/LOAD6
3V3 connector BBU/UPEU/PWR
Easy PowerReceptacle(Pressfit Type)Connector
EPS/LOAD1
7.6 E1/T1Cable
DB26 connector E1/T1 port onthe GTMU orUELP or WMPTor UTRP in theBBU
The connectorneeds to be madeon site accordingto the fieldrequirements.
Port on thetransmissiondevice
7.7 E1/T1SurgeProtectionTransferCable
DB26 connector E1/T1 port onthe GTMU orWMPT orUTRP in theBBU
DB25 connector BBU/UELP/INSIDE
7.8 FE/GECable
RJ-45 connector BBU/UFLP/FE0 port at theOUTSIDE sideBBU/GTMU orWMPT/FE0FE/GE port onthe UTRP in theBBU
RJ-45 connector Port on thetransmissiondevice
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
Cable One End The Other End
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
7.9 FESurgeProtectionTransferCable
RJ-45 connector BBU/GTMU orWMPT/FE0FE/GE port onthe UTRP in theBBUFE/GE port onthe LMPT in theBBU
RJ-45 connector BBU/UFLP/FE0port at theINSIDE side
7.10 CableBetweenTwo FEElectricalPorts
RJ-45 connector BBU/WMPT/FE0
RJ-45 connector BBU/GTMU/FE0
7.11 CableBetweenTwo FEOpticalPorts
LC connector BBU/WMPT/FE1
LC connector BBU/GTMU/FE1
7.12 FE/GEOpticalCable
LC connector BBU/WMPT orGTMU/FE1
FC/SC/LCconnector
Port on thetransmissiondevice
7.13 CPRIFiber OpticCable
DLC connector BBU/GTMU orWBBP/CPRI
DLC connector RRU/CPRI_W
7.14MonitoringSignalCableBetween theAPMI andthe BBU
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/MON1
Twisted pair APMI/TX+, TX-,RX+, RX-
7.15MonitoringSignalCableBetween theHEUA andthe BBU
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/MON
RJ-45 connector HEUA/COM_IN
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
Cable One End The Other End
Connector InstallationPosition
Connector InstallationPosition
7.16MonitoringSignalCableBetween theCMUA andthe BBU
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/MON1
RJ-45 connector CMUA/COM_IN
7.17 EMUAMonitoringSignalCable
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU/MON1
DB9 maleconnector
EMUA/RS-485port
7.18MonitoringSignalCable forthe PSU(DC/DC)
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/EXT_ALM0
Cord endterminal
PSU(DC/DC)/ALM
7.19 In-PositionSignalCable forthe PSU(DC/DC)
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/EXT_ALM1
RJ-45 connector PSU(DC/DC)/PRESENT
7.20 BBUAlarmCable
RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/EXT_ALM
RJ-45 connector Port on theexternalmonitoringdevice
7.21 GPSClockSignalCable
SMA maleconnector
BBU/WMPT orUSCU/GPS
N-type femaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
7.2 PGND CableThe PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.
StructureThe green and yellow PGND cable is a single cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Bothends of the cable are OT terminals. If you prepare the cable by yourself, it is recommended thatyou use a copper-based cable with a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.
Figure 7-1 shows the PGND cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
Figure 7-1 PGND cable
(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)
7.3 BBU Power CableThis section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cablecan be used, depending on the power supply scenario.
Exterior
The BBU power cable depends on the type of the cabinet containing the BBU, because differenttypes of cabinet use different power supplies.
When the power supply device is the DCDU or PDU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connectorat one end and bare wires at the other end. Based on the connector of the power distributiondevice, appropriate terminals are added to the bare wire end on site. Figure 7-2 shows the BBUpower cable with OT terminals at the bare wire end as an example.
Figure 7-2 BBU power cable (1)
(1) 3V3 connector (2) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)
NOTE
There are two wires in the -48 V power cable with a blue wire and a black wire. The +24 V power cableand the -48 V power cable have the same exterior, but they differ in color. The +24 V power cable has ared wire and a black wire.
When the power supply device is the EPS, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at oneend and an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end. Figure 7-3 showsthe BBU power cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
Figure 7-3 BBU power cable (2)
(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2) 3V3 power connector
Pin AssignmentThe power cable is a 2-wire cable. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the pin assignment for thewires of the power cable.
Table 7-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable
Pin on the 3V3Connector
Color Description
A1 Blue -48 V
A2 - -
A3 Black GND
Table 7-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable
Pin on the 3V3 Connector Color Description
A1 Red +24 V
A2 - -
A3 Black GND
7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA.The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.
AppearanceFigure 7-4 shows the appearance of power cable (AC OMB).
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
Figure 7-4 Appearance of power cable (AC OMB)
(1) 3V3 power connector for the BBU (2) H4 connector (3) 3V3 power connector for the HEUA
Figure 7-5 shows the appearance of power cable (DC OMB).
Figure 7-5 Appearance of power cable (DC OMB)
(1) 3V3 power connector (2) OT terminal
7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C)A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.
ExteriorFigure 7-6 shows a BBU power cable. The cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and aneasy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
Figure 7-6 BBU power cable
(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2) 3V3 power connector
Pin AssignmentThe BBU power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-4 lists the pin assignment for the wires ofthe BBU power cable.
Table 7-4 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable
Wire X1 End X2 End Wire Color in MostArea
Wire Color inOther Area
W1 X1.A1 X2.2 Blue Gray
W2 X1.A3 X2.1 Black Blue
7.6 E1/T1 CableThe E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits basebandsignals.
ExteriorThe E1/T1 cables are classified into two types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable and 120-ohm E1 twistedpair cable.
One end of the E1/T1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of thecable should be made on site according to site requirements. Figure 7-7 shows an E1/T1 cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
Figure 7-7 E1/T1 cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 7-5 describes the connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.
Table 7-5 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Cable One End The other End
75-ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector
L9 female connector
SMB female connector
BNC male connector
SMZ male connector
SMZ female connector
Pin AssignmentTable 7-6 and Table 7-7 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable.
NOTE
In Table 7-6, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable, and "Ring" refers to an external conductor ofthe cable.
Table 7-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label
X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+
X1.2 Ring RX1-
X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+
X1.4 Ring RX2-
X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label
X1.6 Ring RX3-
X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+
X1.8 Ring RX4-
X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+
X1.20 Ring TX1-
X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+
X1.22 Ring TX2-
X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+
X1.24 Ring TX3-
X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+
X1.26 Ring TX4-
Table 7-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels
X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+
X.2 White RX1-
X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+
X.4 White RX2-
X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+
X.6 White RX3-
X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+
X.8 White RX4-
X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+
X.20 White TX1-
X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+
X.22 Red TX2-
X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+
X.24 Red TX3-
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels
X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+
X.26 Red TX4-
7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer CableThis section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to thetransmission board. This cable is optional.
ExteriorThe E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-8 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
(1) DB25 male connector (2) DB26 male connector
Pin AssignmentTable 7-8 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable.
Table 7-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the DB26 MaleConnector
Type Pin on the DB25 MaleConnector
X1.20 Twisted pair cable X2.2
X1.19 X2.3
X1.4 Twisted pair cable X2.4
X1.3 X2.5
X1.22 Twisted pair cable X2.6
X1.21 X2.7
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
Pin on the DB26 MaleConnector
Type Pin on the DB25 MaleConnector
X1.6 Twisted pair cable X2.8
X1.5 X2.9
X1.24 Twisted pair cable X2.10
X1.23 X2.11
X1.8 Twisted pair cable X2.12
X1.7 X2.13
X1.1 Twisted pair cable X2.14
X1.2 X2.15
X1.25 Twisted pair cable X2.24
X1.26 X2.25
7.8 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices andtransmits baseband signals.
NOTEThe maximum length of the FE/GE cable for remote connection is 100 m.
Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable. It has an RJ45 connector at each end, asshown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 FE/GE cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-9 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
Table 7-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable
Pin on the RJ45Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2
X1.1 White andorange
X2.1
X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6
X1.3 White andgreen
X2.3
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4
X1.5 White and blue X2.5
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8
X1.7 White andbrown
X2.7
7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer CableThe FE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control boardto the UFLP.
ExteriorThe FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure7-10.
Figure 7-10 FE surge protection transfer cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 7-10 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
Table 7-10 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the RJ45Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connector
X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2
X1.1 White X2.1
X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6
X1.3 White X2.3
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4
X1.5 White X2.5
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8
X1.7 White X2.7
7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical PortsThe cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
StructureThe cable between two FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure7-11.
Figure 7-11 Cable between two FE electrical ports
(1) RJ45 connector
7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical PortsThe cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
StructureThe cable between two FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure7-12.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
Figure 7-12 Cable between two FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
7.12 FE/GE Optical CableThe FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and thetransmission device. This cable is optional.
Exterior
The FE/GE optical cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14, and Figure 7-15respectively.
Figure 7-13 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-14 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-15 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
CAUTIONWhen connecting the BBU3900 and the transmission device using the FE/GE optical cable,adhere to the following rules:l The TX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the RX port on the transmission device.l The RX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the TX port on the transmission device.
7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic CableCPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiberoptic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
NOTE
l When the distance between a BBU and an RRU or between two RRUs is longer than 100 m (328. 08ft.), an ODF is used between the BBU and RRU or between two RRUs.
l A single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU to an ODF or connects an ODF to an RRU.
ExteriorFigure 7-16 shows a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs, with aDLC connector at each end.
Figure 7-16 Fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs
(1) DLC connector (2) Branch (3) Label on the branch
When a multi-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the branches on the BBUside and RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18 in.) long, respectively. When a multi-mode fiber optic cable connects to two RRUs, the branches on both RRU sides are 0.03 m (1.18in.) long.
Figure 7-17 shows the connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
Figure 7-17 Connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
(1) CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
Figure 7-18 shows a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between anODF and an RRU, with a DLC connector at one end and an FC connector at the other end.
Figure 7-18 Single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF andan RRU
(1) DLC connector (2) Branch
(3) Label on the branch (4) FC connector
When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an ODF, the branches on the BBUside and ODF side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.8 m (31.5 in.) long, respectively.
When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects an ODF and an RRU, the branches on the RRUside and ODF side are 0.03 m (1.18 in.) and 0.8 m (31.5 in.) long, respectively.
Figure 7-19 shows the connections for a single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBUand an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
Figure 7-19 Connections for a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF orbetween an ODF and an RRU
(1) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBUand an ODF
(2) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between anODF and an RRU
NOTE
CPRI fiber optic cables must be connected to the optical modules in the CPRI ports. Multi-mode fiber opticcables and single-mode fiber optic cables are connected to multi-mode optical modules and single-mode opticalmodules, respectively.
Pin Assignment
Table 7-11, Table 7-12, and Table 7-13 describe the labels on and recommended fiber opticcable connections.
Table 7-11 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a fiber optic cable betweena BBU and an RRU
Label Installation Position
1A CPRI RX port on the RRU
1B CPRI TX port on the RRU
2A TX port on the BBU
2B RX port on the BBU
Table 7-12 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a fiber optic cable betweenRRUs
Label Installation Position
1A CPRI RX port on RRU 1
1B CPRI TX port on RRU 1
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
Label Installation Position
2A CPRI TX port on RRU 0
2B CPRI RX port on RRU 0
Table 7-13 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a single-mode fiber opticcable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
Label Installation Position
1A RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU
1B TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU
2A ODF
2B ODF
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and theBBU
This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits theenvironment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.
Structure
The monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU has an RJ-45 connector at one endand four bare wires at the other end. Figure 7-20 shows the monitoring signal cable betweenthe APMI and the BBU.
Figure 7-20 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU
Pin Assignment
Table 7-14 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe APMI and the BBU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
Table 7-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI andthe BBU
Pin on theRJ-45Connector
Color X2 to X5 Ends Description Terminal on theAPMI
X1.1 White X2 Twisted pair TX+
X1.2 Orange X3 TX-
X1.4 Blue X4 Twisted pair RX+
X1.5 White X5 RX-
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and theBBU
The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoringinformation collected by the HEUA to the BBU.
AppearanceFigure 7-21 shows the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU.
Figure 7-21 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 7-15 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe HEUA and the BBU.
Table 7-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA andthe BBU
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and theBBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBUand transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-22 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.
Figure 7-22 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-16 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe CMUA and the BBU.
Table 7-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA andthe BBU
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal CableThis section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals fromthe EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
ExteriorFigure 7-23 shows the EMUA monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-23 EMUA monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ-45 connector (2) DB9 male connector
Pin AssignmentTable 7-17 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable.
Table 7-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable
Pin on theRJ-45Connector
Pin on the DB9Male Connector
Color Description Terminal onthe APMI
X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+
X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-
X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-
X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerfault alarms on the PSU.
Structure
Figure 7-24 shows the Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-24 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).
Table 7-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.2 Blue Twisted pair
X1.1 White
X1.6 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 White
X1.4 Green Twisted pair
X1.5 White
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair
X1.7 White
7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.
Exterior
Figure 7-25 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
Figure 7-25 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 7-19 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).
Table 7-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
7.20 BBU Alarm CableThe BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.
ExteriorThe BBU alarm cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-26. However,an RJ-45 connector at one end may be removed, and an appropriate terminal may be addedaccording to the field requirements.
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
Figure 7-26 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-20 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.
Table 7-20 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable
BBUAlarmPort
Pin on theRJ45Connector at OneEnd
WireColor
WireType
Pin on theRJ45Connector at theOtherEnd
Description
EXT-ALM1
X1.1 White andorange
Twistedpair
X2.1 Boolean value input 4+
X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 4-(GND)
X1.3 White andgreen
Twistedpair
X2.3 Boolean value input 5+
X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 5-(GND)
X1.5 White andblue
Twistedpair
X2.5 Boolean value input 6+
X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 6-(GND)
X1.7 White andbrown
Twistedpair
X2.7 Boolean value input 7+
X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 7-(GND)
EXT-ALM0
X1.1 White andorange
Twistedpair
X2.1 Boolean value input 0+
X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 0-(GND)
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
BBUAlarmPort
Pin on theRJ45Connector at OneEnd
WireColor
WireType
Pin on theRJ45Connector at theOtherEnd
Description
X1.3 White andgreen
Twistedpair
X2.3 Boolean value input 1+
X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 1-(GND)
X1.5 White andblue
Twistedpair
X2.5 Boolean value input 2+
X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 2-(GND)
X1.7 White andbrown
Twistedpair
X2.7 Boolean value input 3+
X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 3-(GND)
7.21 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPSantenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type femaleconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-27.
Figure 7-27 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector
BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Cables
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
About This Chapter
This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA andSLPU.
8.1 EMUAThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinetand reports related alarms.
8.2 OMBThe Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMBcabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmissionequipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internalmodules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, andthe grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture,mould, and salt fog damage.
8.3 IMB03The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-inBBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.
8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized RackA 10 U indoor centralized rack is installed indoors to provide a 19-inch wide space for equipment.
8.5 DCDU-03The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component inthe cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B andDCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models havethe same exterior and engineering specifications.
8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11CThe DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supplypower to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.
8.7 AC/DC Power EquipmentThe AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input powerdistribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DCpower to the components in the cabinet.
8.8 SLPUThe signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
8.9 WGRUThe WGRU (WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit) receives and processes positioning informationand synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then outputs the timing signals as a systemclock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate PPSsignals and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The WGRU is optional forthe NodeB which is installed in the WGRU box. The NodeB can be configured with one WGRUwhich provides the positioning function.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
8.1 EMUAThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinetand reports related alarms.
The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring theenvironment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the followingitems:
l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke
l Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor
l Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
8.2 OMBThe Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMBcabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmissionequipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internalmodules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, andthe grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture,mould, and salt fog damage.
Appearance
Figure 8-1 shows the OMB cabinet.
Figure 8-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
FunctionsThe functions of the OMB cabinet are as follows:l Providing 3 U installation space for the distributed BTS.l Supporting the AC input modes of 220 V single-phase, 110 V dual-live two-phase.l Supporting -48 V DC power input.l Providing secure and reliable surge protection and inductive lightning protection through
the AC surge protection box (optional).l Connecting the grounding bus of the cabinet, PGND cable of the surge protector, and PGND
cables of other devices to the grounding busbar of the cabinet.l Dissipating heat by using the core of the heat exchanger and outer and inner air circulation
fans and enabling excellent heat dissipation.l Protecting itself against dust, adapting to different environments even though in adverse
air conditions.l Being capable of working with the distributed or separated base stations and meeting the
requirements in different scenarios.
StructureThere are two types of OMBs, that is, the AC OMB and DC OMB.
The AC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, AC/DC power equipment, and AC surge protectionbox, as shown in Figure 8-2.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
Figure 8-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB
(1) HEUA (2) BBU (3) AC/DC power equipment (4) AC surge protection box
The DC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 8-3.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
Figure 8-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB
(1) HEUA (2) BBU (3) DCDU-03B
Specifications
Table 8-1 lists the specifications of the OMB.
Table 8-1 Specifications of the OMB
Item Specification
Dimensions 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (height x widthx depth)
Weight OMB subrack: ≤ 15 kgAC OMB: ≤ 25 kgDC OMB: ≤ 22.5kg
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
Item Specification
Temperature Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°CShort-term working at 50°C to 55°CNOTE
The short-term work indicates that the continuouswork does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulatedworking time in a year does not exceed 15 days.
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
8.3 IMB03The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-inBBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.
Exterior
Figure 8-4 shows an IMB03.
Figure 8-4 IMB03
(1) Front cover plate of the IMB03 (2) Protection cover
(3) Warning label to avoid treading (4) Slots of internal modules in the IMB03
Functions
The IMB03 performs the following functions:l Provides a 3 U space for a distributed base station.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
l Supports 220 V single-phase AC input and 110 V dual-live-wire AC input.l Supports power input of -48 V DC.l Supports various installation modes, including the wall-mounting mode, rack-mounting
mode, and combined-with-IFS06 mode.l Provides a well-developed function of heat dissipation and facilitates cabling of internal
modules.
StructureThere are two types of IMB03, that is, the DC IMB03 and AC IMB03.
A DC IMB03 houses the BBU and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 DC IMB03
(1) DCDU-03B (2) BBU
An AC IMB03 houses a BBU and AC/DC power equipment, as shown in Figure 8-6.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
Figure 8-6 AC IMB03
(1) AC/DC power equipment (2) BBU
Specifications
Table 8-2 lists the specifications of the IMB03.
Table 8-2 Specifications of the IMB03
Item Specification
Dimensions 560 mm (22.05 in.) x 425 mm (16.73 in.) x180 mm (7.09 in.) (height x width x depth)
Weight 10 kg
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized RackA 10 U indoor centralized rack is installed indoors to provide a 19-inch wide space for equipment.
ExteriorA 10 U indoor centralized rack is 19-inch wide and 10 U high, as shown in Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 10 U indoor centralized rack
(1) Left frame (2) Right frame
FunctionsA 10 U indoor centralized rack provides the following functions:l Provides a 10 U space for a distributed base station.l Supports power input of -48 V DC.l Connects the main ground cable for the rack and ground cable for equipment to the ground
terminal on the rack.
SpecificationsTable 8-3 lists the specifications for the 10 U indoor centralized rack.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
Table 8-3 Specifications for the 10 U indoor centralized rack
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D) 700 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (27.56 in. x23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)
Weight 15 kg (33.08 lb)
8.5 DCDU-03The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component inthe cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B andDCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models havethe same exterior and engineering specifications.
ExteriorFigure 8-8 shows the DCDU-03.
Figure 8-8 DCDU-03
FunctionsThe DCDU-03 provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different MCB configurations to meet thepower distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations.
Table 8-4 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
Table 8-4 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03
DCDUModel
DC OutputTerminal
PowerConsumptionEquipment
MCBSpecification
MCBQuantity
Application Scenario
DCDU-03B LOAD0 toLOAD5
RRU 20 A 6 Distributedbase station/Mini basestationLOAD6 to
LOAD8BBU and thetransmissionequipment ofthe customer
12 A 3
DCDU-03C LOAD0 toLOAD5
Transmission equipmentof thecustomer
12 A 6 Separatedmacro basestation in the-48 V DCpowersupply/Transmission cabinet
LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1
LOAD7 Transmission equipmentof thecustomer
6 A 1
LOAD8 Fan box 6 A 1
PortsFigure 8-9 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
Figure 8-9 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03
Table 8-5 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.
Table 8-5 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03
Port Specification Power Cable Cross-Sectional Area
Remarks
DC inputterminal
Supports theM6 2-hole OTterminal (oneinput)
l DCDU-03B:maximum = 25mm2,default = 25mm2,
l DCDU-03C:maximum = 25mm2,default = 16mm2,
When the DCDU-03C is usedin the transmission cabinet,the cross-sectional area of theinput power cable is 4 mm2.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
Port Specification Power Cable Cross-Sectional Area
Remarks
DC outputterminal
Supports theM4 single holeOT terminal (9outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2 l The specification for apower cable depends onthe device to which thecable is connected. Forexample, the specificationfor a fan power cable is 2.5mm2.
l Three rows of wiringterminals for outputs:NEG(-), RTN(+), andPGND, where, the lastthree pairs of the PGNDwiring terminals supportthe grounding of the M4 2-hole OT terminals, whichare marked in red inFigure 8-9
8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11CThe DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supplypower to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.
ExteriorFigure 8-10 and Figure 8-11 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11Crespectively.
Figure 8-10 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
Figure 8-11 Rear view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
NOTEThe DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B usesthe equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the openrack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device,which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear ofthe DCDU-11B.
Function
The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten –48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breakerconfigurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro basestation.
Table 8-6 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Table 8-6 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
DCDUType
DCOutputTerminal
Equipment CircuitBreakerSpecifications
CircuitBreaker
Description
DCDU-11B
LOAD0toLOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5 25 A SW0 toSW5
Distributed ormini base station
LOAD6 BBU or transmissionequipment
25 A SW6
LOAD7 BBU or transmissionequipment
25 A SW7
LOAD8 EMUA ortransmissionequipment
25 A SW8
LOAD9 Fan box 25 A SW9
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
DCDUType
DCOutputTerminal
Equipment CircuitBreakerSpecifications
CircuitBreaker
Description
DCDU-11C
LOAD0 Transmissionequipment
6 A SW0 –48 V outdoormacro basestation ortransmissioncabinet
LOAD1 Transmissionequipment
6 A SW1
LOAD2 Transmissionequipment
12 A SW2
LOAD3 Transmissionequipment
12 A SW3
LOAD4 Transmissionequipment
25 A SW4
LOAD5 Transmissionequipment
25 A SW5
LOAD6 BBU or transmissionequipment
25 A SW6
LOAD7 BBU or transmissionequipment
25 A SW7
LOAD8 EMUA ortransmissionequipment
25 A SW8
LOAD9 Fan box 25 A SW9
PortsFigure 8-12 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
Figure 8-12 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Table 8-7 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Table 8-7 Specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
SN
Port Label Terminal andCable
Description
(1) DC inputterminal
NEG(-) M6 one-hole OTterminal (two wires)and a maximumcross-sectional areaof 25 mm2.
Negative power input wiringterminal
RTN(+) Positive power input wiringterminal
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
SN
Port Label Terminal andCable
Description
(2) DCoutputterminal
LOAD0 toLOAD9
DCDU-11B:l Figure 8-13
shows an easypower receptacle(pressfit type)connectoradapting toLOAD0 toLOAD5terminals. Themaximum cross-sectional area is10 mm2.
l Figure 8-14shows an easypower receptacle(pressfit type)connectoradapting toLOAD6 toLOAD9terminals. Themaximum cross-sectional area is 4mm2.
DCDU-11C: Figure8-14 shows an easypower receptacle(pressfit type)connector adapting toLOAD0 to LOAD9terminals. Themaximum cross-sectional area is 4mm2.
For details about DC outputspecifications, see Table 8-6.
(3) Circuitbreaker
SW0 to SW9 - The circuit breakers SW0 toSW9 control the ports LOAD0to LOAD9 respectively,controlling the power suppliesto the BBU, fan box, DC heater,and transmission equipment.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
Figure 8-13 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (1)
Figure 8-14 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2)
8.7 AC/DC Power EquipmentThe AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input powerdistribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convertthe 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DCpower to the components in the cabinet.
Appearance
Figure 8-15 shows the AC/DC power equipment.
Figure 8-15 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power distribution control switch for the RRU
(5) Power distribution control switch for the transmissionequipment
(6) Rectifier
(7) Monitoring port (8) DC output port LOAD1
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
(9) DC output port LOAD2 (10) Output port for the batteries BATT
Interface
Table 8-8 describes the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 8-8 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment
InterfaceType
Label Description Connector Type
AC powersupply socket
INPUT AC power supply socket 3-pin male connector
Monitoringport
RS232 Reserved port -
RS485 Monitoring port for therectifier
RJ-45 connector
COM Reserved port -
DC output port LOAD1 Output port for the BBU andHEUA(10A)
H4 connector
LOAD2 Output port for thetransmission equipment(20A)
H4 connector
BAT Output port for the batteries(20A)
H4 connector
DC outputwiringterminal
RRU Wiring terminal for the RRUpower cable(12A)
OT terminal
TM Wiring terminal for thepower cable for thetransmission equipment(4A)
OT terminal
LED
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the panel of the rectifier in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 8-9 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier
Label Color Name Status Description
RUN Green Run LED ON The rectifier is running properly.
OFF An error occurs during the runningof the rectifier.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
Label Color Name Status Description
ALARM Yellow Alarm LED ON Output overcurrent alarm orovertemperature alarm
Blinking The communication is disrupted.
OFF The rectifier is running properly.
FAULT Red Fault LED ON Fan faults, output overvoltage, andexternal short circuit.
OFF The rectifier is running properly.
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC powerequipment.
Table 8-10 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module
Label Color Name Status Description
RUN Green Run LED Blinking (onfor 1s and offfor 1s)
The module is running properly.
Blinking (onfor 0.125sand off for0.125s)
The module is not faulty but unableto communicate with the PMUproperly.
ALM Red Alarm LED ON An alarm is generated.
OFF No alarm is generated.
DIP SwitchesFigure 8-16 shows the DIP switches on the PMU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
Figure 8-16 DIP switches on the PMU
Table 8-11 describes the settings of the DIP switches on the PMU.
Table 8-11 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU
No. Function Operation
1~5 Defines the communicationaddress of the PMU
(1) Switches 1 to 5correspond to bits 0 to 4. ON:1, OFF: 0For example: to set theaddress of PMU to 3, setswitches 3 to 5 as OFF.(2) Default setting beforedelivery:1 (BIT0), ON2 (BIT1), ON3 (BIT2), OFF4 (BIT3), OFF5 (BIT4), OFF
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
No. Function Operation
6 Selects baud rate forcommunicating with the BTS
Set as ON, indicating that thebaud rate is 9600. (If it is setas OFF, the baud rate is19200.)
7 and 8 Reserved and not defined Set as OFF
SpecificationsTable 8-12 lists the specifications of the AC/DC Power Equipment.
Table 8-12 Specifications of the AC/DC Power Equipment
Item Specification
Input voltage range 176 V AC to 290 V AC for the 220 V AC single-phase inputpower90 V AC to 175 V AC for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire inputpower
Frequency of the inputvoltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage range –42 V DC to –58 V DC
Output current 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power7.5 A for the110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability 2 kA in differential mode4 kA in common mode
8.8 SLPUThe signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
8.8.1 Exterior of SLPUThe SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space.
Figure 8-17 shows the SLPU.
Figure 8-17 SLPU
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPUThis section describes the configuration principles of the SPLU.
Slots of the SLPUFigure 8-18 shows the slots of the SLPU.
Figure 8-18 Slots of the SLPU
Configuration of the SLPUWhen serving as a trunk signal protection unit, the SLPU is a mandatory component, and it isintegrated with a UELP or UFLP and installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet.Table 8-13 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.
Table 8-13 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1)
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot ConfigurationRestriction
UELP Optional 4 Slots 0 to 3 The priorities ofthe slots inconfigurationare as follows indescendingorder: slot 2, slot0, slot 1, and slot3.
UFLP Optional 1 Slot 3 If both theUELP andUFLP areconfigured, theUFLP isinstalled in a slotwith a higherpriority than theUELP.
When serving as a monitoring signal protection unit for not more than 16 dry contacts, the SLPUis an optional component, and it is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U spaceat the bottom of the BBU. Table 8-14 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
Table 8-14 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2)
Board Optional/Mandatory
Quantity Slot ConfigurationRestriction
USLP2 Optional 2 Slots 2 and 3 -
8.8.3 UELPEach Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for fourpaths of E1/T1 signals.
PanelFigure 8-19 shows the panel of the UELP.
Figure 8-19 UELP panel
PortsTable 8-15 lists the ports of the UELP.
Table 8-15 Ports of the UELP
Label Connector Description
INSIDE DB25 connector Connected to the board fortransmission in the base station
OUTSIDE DB26 connector Connected to the externaltransmission devices
DIP SwitchThe UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 8-20 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
Figure 8-20 DIP switch on the UELP
Table 8-16 describes the DIP switch on the UELP.
Table 8-16 DIP switch on the UELP
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not grounded
Other status Grounded
NOTEThe 75-ohm E1 cable can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the 120-ohm E1 cable and the 100-ohm T1 cable cannot be grounded.
8.8.4 UFLPThe universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit,each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection.
PanelFigure 8-21 shows the panel of the UFLP.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
Figure 8-21 Panel of the UFLP
Ports
Table 8-17 describes the ports on the panel of the UFLP.
Table 8-17 Ports on the panel of the UFLP
Port Location Label Connector Type Description
INSIDE side FE0, FE1 RJ-45 Connected to theboard fortransmission in thebase station
OUTSIDE side FE0, FE1 RJ-45 Connected to theexternaltransmissiondevices
8.8.5 USLP2The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protectionunit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel
Figure 8-22 shows the panel of the USLP2.
Figure 8-22 Panel of the USLP2
Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 8-18 lists the ports on thepanel of the USLP2.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
Table 8-18 Ports on the panel of the USLP2
Label Port Type Quantity Description
IN0, IN1, IN2,and IN3
4-pin 4 Input ports used toconnect the customizedalarm devices.
OUT0, OUT1 RJ45 2 Output ports used toconnect the EXT-ALMport of the UEIU orUPEU in the cabinet.
Figure 8-23 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports onthe USLP2.
Figure 8-23 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 48 6 4 27 5 3 1
8 6 4 27 5 3 1
IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3OUT0 OUT1
Table 8-19 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on theUSLP2.
Table 8-19 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
Input Output
Label Pin Label Pin
IN0 IN0.1 OUT1 OUT1.1
IN0.2 OUT1.2
IN0.3 OUT1.4
IN0.4 OUT1.5
IN1 IN1.1 OUT1.3
IN1.2 OUT1.6
IN1.3 OUT1.7
IN1.4 OUT1.8
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
Input Output
Label Pin Label Pin
IN2 IN2.1 OUT0 OUT0.1
IN2.2 OUT0.2
IN2.3 OUT0.4
IN2.4 OUT0.5
IN3 IN3.1 OUT0.3
IN3.2 OUT0.6
IN3.3 OUT0.7
IN3.4 OUT0.8
For details about the application of the USLP2, see 8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU.
8.9 WGRUThe WGRU (WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit) receives and processes positioning informationand synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then outputs the timing signals as a systemclock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate PPSsignals and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The WGRU is optional forthe NodeB which is installed in the WGRU box. The NodeB can be configured with one WGRUwhich provides the positioning function.
AppearanceFigure 8-24 shows the exterior of WGRU, Figure 8-25 shows the WGRU installed in the WGRUbox.
Figure 8-24 Exterior of the WGRU
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
Figure 8-25 WGRU installed in the WGRU box
PanelThe components on the front panel of the WGRU suite are LEDs, RST button, and output ports.The Figure 8-26 shows the front panel of the WGRU.
The components on the rear panel are the power input socket and the GPS signal input port. TheFigure 8-27 shows the rear panel of the WGRU box.
Figure 8-26 Front panel of the WGRU
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
Figure 8-27 Rear panel of the WGRU box
Indicators on the Front Panel of the WGRU
This describes indicators on the front panel of the WGRU. There are three indicators, that is theRUN, ALM, and ACT indicators on the front panel of the WGRU.
Table 8-20 describes the indicators.
Table 8-20 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU
Indicator Color Status Meaning
RUN Green On for 1s and off for1s
The WGRU suiteworks properly.
On The power supply isnormal but theWGRU suite isfaulty.
Off The power supply isabnormal or theWGRU suite isfaulty.
ALM Red Off There is no alarm.
On There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green On The WGRU suiteobtains correctpositioninginformation.
Off The WGRU suitecannot obtain correctpositioninginformation.
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
Ports on the Front Panel of the WGRUThe following describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. The ports consist of PPS1,PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and CLK2.
Table 8-21 lists the ports.
Table 8-21 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU
Name Type Description
PPS1 RJ-45 It outputs PPS signals
PPS2 RJ-45 Obligate
COM1 RJ-45 It is used to transmit GPSinformation and exchangemanagement andmaintenance informationwith BBU.
COM2 RJ-45 Obligate
CLK1 RJ-45 Obligate
CLK2 RJ-45 Obligate
Ports on the Rear PanelThe rear panel of the WGRU consists of the POWER port and ANT port.
Table 8-22 describes the ports on the rear panel of the WGRU.
Table 8-22 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU
Port Label Connector Description
POWER Two-pole male connector Used to feed external power
ANT N-type female connector Used for the connection tothe GPS antenna system
BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303